Dell B5465dnf User's Manual

Dell B5465dnf Laser MFP
User's Guide
February 2014
www.dell.com | dell.com/support/printers
Trademarks
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2014 Dell, Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of this material in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude, PowerEdge, PowerVault, PowerApp, and Dell OpenManage are trademarks
of Dell Inc.; Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation; AirPrint and
the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to the entities claiming the marks and names of their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary
interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.
Contents
2
Contents
Safety information.......................................................................................8
Learning about the printer.........................................................................10
Finding information about the printer....................................................................................................10
Selecting a location for the printer..........................................................................................................11
Printer configurations.............................................................................................................................12
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner..................................................................................14
Using the ADF and scanner glass.............................................................................................................15
Understanding the printer control panel....................................................16
Using the printer control panel...............................................................................................................16
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights........................................................16
Understanding the home screen.............................................................................................................17
Using the touch-screen buttons..............................................................................................................19
Setting up and using the home screen applications....................................21
Finding the IP address of the printer.......................................................................................................21
Finding the IP address of the computer..................................................................................................21
Accessing the Embedded Web Server.....................................................................................................21
Customizing the home screen.................................................................................................................22
Understanding the different applications...............................................................................................22
Activating the home screen applications................................................................................................23
Finding information about the home screen applications................................................................................23
Setting up Forms and Favorites ........................................................................................................................23
Setting up Card Copy ........................................................................................................................................23
Using MyShortcut .............................................................................................................................................24
Setting up Multi Send .......................................................................................................................................25
Setting up Scan to Network ..............................................................................................................................25
Setting up Remote Operator Panel.........................................................................................................26
Exporting and importing a configuration................................................................................................26
Additional printer setup.............................................................................28
Installing internal options........................................................................................................................28
Available internal options .................................................................................................................................28
Accessing the controller board .........................................................................................................................28
Installing a memory card ..................................................................................................................................32
Installing an optional card ................................................................................................................................33
Contents
3
Installing an Internal Solutions Port..................................................................................................................35
Installing a printer hard disk .............................................................................................................................39
Removing a printer hard disk............................................................................................................................43
Installing hardware options.....................................................................................................................45
Order of installation..........................................................................................................................................45
Installing optional trays ....................................................................................................................................46
Attaching cables......................................................................................................................................48
Setting up the printer software...............................................................................................................50
Installing the printer .........................................................................................................................................50
Adding available options in the print driver .....................................................................................................51
Networking..............................................................................................................................................51
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network..................................................................................51
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network.....................................................................................52
Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard.................................................................................53
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup ....................................................53
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server.............................................54
Changing port settings after installing a new network ISP ...............................................................................54
Setting up serial printing...................................................................................................................................55
Verifying printer setup............................................................................................................................55
Printing a menu settings page ..........................................................................................................................55
Printing a network setup page..........................................................................................................................56
Loading paper and specialty media............................................................57
Setting the paper size and type...............................................................................................................57
Configuring Universal paper settings......................................................................................................57
Loading the 550‑sheet tray.....................................................................................................................57
Loading the 2100‑sheet tray...................................................................................................................64
Loading the multipurpose feeder............................................................................................................70
Linking and unlinking trays......................................................................................................................74
Linking and unlinking trays ...............................................................................................................................74
Creating a custom name for a paper type ........................................................................................................75
Assigning a custom paper type .........................................................................................................................75
Paper and specialty media guide................................................................77
Using specialty media..............................................................................................................................77
Tips on using card stock....................................................................................................................................77
Tips on using envelopes....................................................................................................................................77
Tips on using labels...........................................................................................................................................78
Tips on using letterhead ...................................................................................................................................78
Tips on using transparencies ............................................................................................................................79
Paper guidelines......................................................................................................................................79
Paper characteristics.........................................................................................................................................79
Contents
4
Selecting paper .................................................................................................................................................80
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead ......................................................................................................80
Using recycled paper and other office papers ..................................................................................................80
Storing paper ....................................................................................................................................................82
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights.............................................................................................82
Paper sizes supported by the printer................................................................................................................82
Paper types and weights supported by the printer ..........................................................................................83
Printing......................................................................................................85
Printing forms and a document...............................................................................................................85
Printing from a flash drive.......................................................................................................................86
Printing from a mobile device.................................................................................................................88
Printing confidential and other held jobs................................................................................................89
Printing information pages......................................................................................................................91
Canceling a print job................................................................................................................................91
Copying......................................................................................................93
Making copies.........................................................................................................................................93
Copying photos........................................................................................................................................94
Copying on specialty media.....................................................................................................................94
Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel.......................................................................95
Customizing copy settings.......................................................................................................................96
Placing information on copies...............................................................................................................101
Canceling a copy job..............................................................................................................................102
Understanding the copy options...........................................................................................................102
E-mailing..................................................................................................106
Setting up the printer to e-mail.............................................................................................................106
Creating an e-mail shortcut...................................................................................................................107
E-mailing a document............................................................................................................................108
Customizing e-mail settings...................................................................................................................109
Canceling an e-mail...............................................................................................................................110
Understanding the e-mail options........................................................................................................110
Faxing......................................................................................................113
Setting up the printer to fax..................................................................................................................113
Sending a fax.........................................................................................................................................128
Creating shortcuts.................................................................................................................................131
Customizing fax settings........................................................................................................................131
Contents
5
Canceling an outgoing fax.....................................................................................................................133
Holding and forwarding faxes...............................................................................................................133
Understanding the fax options..............................................................................................................134
Scanning...................................................................................................137
Using Scan to Network..........................................................................................................................137
Scanning to an FTP address...................................................................................................................137
Scanning to a computer or flash drive..................................................................................................139
Understanding the scan options...........................................................................................................141
Understanding the printer menus............................................................144
Menus list..............................................................................................................................................144
Paper menu...........................................................................................................................................145
Reports Menu........................................................................................................................................156
Network/Ports menu.............................................................................................................................157
Security menu.......................................................................................................................................170
Settings menu........................................................................................................................................175
Help menu.............................................................................................................................................222
Saving money and the environment.........................................................223
Saving paper and toner.........................................................................................................................223
Using recycled paper ......................................................................................................................................223
Conserving supplies ........................................................................................................................................223
Saving energy........................................................................................................................................224
Using Eco‑Mode..............................................................................................................................................224
Reducing printer noise....................................................................................................................................224
Adjusting Sleep mode .....................................................................................................................................225
Using Hibernate mode ....................................................................................................................................226
Adjusting the brightness of the printer display ..............................................................................................226
Recycling................................................................................................................................................227
Recycling Dell products...................................................................................................................................227
Securing the printer..................................................................................228
Statement of Volatility..........................................................................................................................228
Erasing volatile memory........................................................................................................................228
Erasing non‑volatile memory................................................................................................................229
Erasing printer hard disk memory.........................................................................................................229
Configuring printer hard disk encryption..............................................................................................230
Finding printer security information.....................................................................................................231
Contents
6
Maintaining the printer............................................................................232
Cleaning printer parts............................................................................................................................232
Cleaning the printer ........................................................................................................................................232
Cleaning the scanner glass..............................................................................................................................233
Checking the status of parts and supplies.............................................................................................235
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel......................................................... 235
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server .................................................235
Estimated number of remaining pages.................................................................................................235
Ordering parts and supplies..................................................................................................................236
Ordering supplies using the Supplies Ordering Utility ....................................................................................236
Ordering supplies using Printer Home............................................................................................................236
Storing supplies.....................................................................................................................................236
Replacing supplies.................................................................................................................................237
Replacing the toner cartridge .........................................................................................................................237
Replacing the imaging unit .............................................................................................................................240
Moving the printer................................................................................................................................243
Before moving the printer ..............................................................................................................................243
Moving the printer to another location..........................................................................................................244
Shipping the printer ........................................................................................................................................244
Managing the printer...............................................................................245
Managing printer messages..................................................................................................................245
Accessing Status Monitor Center..........................................................................................................245
Checking the virtual display...................................................................................................................245
Setting up e‑mail alerts.........................................................................................................................246
Viewing reports.....................................................................................................................................246
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server.......................................................246
Restoring factory default settings.........................................................................................................247
Clearing jams............................................................................................248
Avoiding jams........................................................................................................................................248
Understanding jam messages and locations.........................................................................................249
[x]‑page jam, lift front cover to remove cartridge. [200–201]..............................................................251
[x]‑page jam, open upper rear door. [202]...........................................................................................254
[x]‑page jam, open upper and lower rear door. [231–234]..................................................................255
[x]‑page jam, remove standard bin jam. [203]......................................................................................257
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [235–239].......................................................................258
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24x]..........................................................................................................259
Contents
7
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder. [250]..............................................................................................260
[x]‑page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx].....................................................................261
Troubleshooting.......................................................................................264
Understanding the printer messages....................................................................................................264
Solving printer problems.......................................................................................................................281
Solving print problems..........................................................................................................................288
Solving copy problems..........................................................................................................................314
Solving fax problems.............................................................................................................................317
Solving scanner problems.....................................................................................................................323
Solving home screen application problems...........................................................................................328
Embedded Web Server does not open.................................................................................................328
Contacting technical support................................................................................................................329
Appendix..................................................................................................330
Index........................................................................................................332
Safety information
8
Safety information
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a
danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a
lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local
regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• If an optional tray is installed, then remove it from the printer. To remove the optional tray, slide the latch on the
right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.
• Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
• Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
• Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Use only the telecommunications (RJ‑11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when
connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not
subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture
and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly
for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.
Safety information
9
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, contact the place where you purchased the printer.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Learning about the printer
10
Learning about the printer
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for?
Find it here
Initial setup instructions:
Setup documentation—The setup documentation came
with the printer.
• Connecting the printer
• Installing the printer software
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
Loading paper
Configuring printer settings
User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The guides may
be available on the Software and Documentation CD.
For more information, visit our Web site at
www.dell.com/support/manuals.
Viewing and printing documents and photos
Setting up and using the printer software
Configuring the printer on a network
Caring for and maintaining the printer
Troubleshooting and solving problems
Instructions for:
• Connecting the printer to an Ethernet network
• Troubleshooting printer connection problems
Help using the printer software
Networking Guide—Open the Software and
Documentation CD, and then navigate to:
Documentation > User’s Guide and other publications >
Networking Guide
Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software program
or application, and then click Help.
Click
?
to view context‑sensitive information.
Notes:
• Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.
• The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending on
your operating system.
The latest supplemental information, updates, and technical
support:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Documentation
Driver downloads
Product upgrades
Service call and repair information
Order status
Live chat support
E‑mail support
Voice support
Dell support Web site—
www.dell.com/support/printers
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for
your country or region can be found on the support Web
site.
Have the following information ready when you contact
support so that they may serve you faster:
• Service tag
• Express service Code
Note: The service tag and express service code appear
on labels located on your printer.
Learning about the printer
11
What are you looking for?
Find it here
• Software and Drivers—Certified drivers for your printer and Software and Documentation CD
installers for Dell printer software
• Readme files—Last‑minute technical changes, or advanced
technical reference materials for experienced users or
technicians
• Supplies and accessories for your printer
• Replacement cartridges
• Safety information for preparing to operate your printer
• Regulatory information
• Warranty information
Dell printer supplies Web site–www.dell.com/printers
You can purchase printer supplies online, by telephone,
or in select retail stores.
Product Information Guide
Note: The Product Information Guide may not be
available in your country or region.
Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any
options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
• Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee
156 standard.
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:
– Clean, dry, and free of dust.
– Away from stray staples and paper clips.
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
– Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
• Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:
Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Storage temperature
1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)
• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
Learning about the printer
12
5
4
1
1
3
1
Right side 152 mm (6 in.)
2
Front
394 mm (15.5 in.)
3
Left side
152 mm (6 in.)
4
Rear
152 mm (6 in.)
5
Top
152 mm (6 in.)
2
Printer configurations
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Learning about the printer
13
Basic model
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
2
ADF tray
3
ADF bin
4
Standard bin
5
Printer control panel
6
100‑sheet multipurpose feeder
7
Standard 550‑sheet tray
Learning about the printer
14
Fully configured model
The following illustration shows the maximum number of optional trays that are supported by the printer. For more
information on other configurations, visit our Web site.
1
3
1
1
2
1
Optional 550‑sheet trays
Note: A lockable 550‑sheet tray is also available. For more information, contact the place where you purchased
the printer.
2
Caster base
3
Optional 2100‑sheet tray
When using optional trays:
• Always use a caster base when the printer is configured with an optional 2100‑sheet tray.
• The optional 2100‑sheet tray must always be at the bottom of a configuration and may be paired with only one
optional 550‑sheet tray.
• Three optional 550‑sheet trays may be configured with the printer.
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner
•
•
•
•
•
Make quick copies or set the printer to perform specific copy jobs.
Send a fax using the printer control panel.
Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, a flash drive, or an FTP destination.
Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF through an FTP).
Learning about the printer
15
Using the ADF and scanner glass
Scanner glass
A
B
C
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including two- Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book pages,
sided (duplex) pages.
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents.
Using the ADF
When using the ADF:
•
•
•
•
•
Load the document into the ADF tray faceup, short edge first.
Load up to 150 sheets of plain paper into the ADF tray.
Scan sizes from 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) wide to 216 x 635 mm (8.5 x 25 inches) long
Scan media weighs from 52 to 120 g/m2 (14–32 lb).
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings)
into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Using the scanner glass
When using the scanner glass:
• Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow.
• Scan or copy documents up to 216 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
• Copy books up to 25.3 mm (1 inch) thick.
Understanding the printer control panel
16
Understanding the printer control panel
Using the printer control panel
Use the
To
1
Display
2
Home button
Go to the home screen.
3
Sleep button
Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
• View the printer status and messages.
• Set up and operate the printer.
Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode:
•
•
•
•
•
Touch the screen or press any hard button.
Open a door or cover.
Send a print job from the computer.
Perform a power‑on reset (POR) with the main power switch.
Attach a device to the USB port on the printer.
4
Keypad
Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
5
Start button
Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.
6
Clear All / Reset button Reset the default settings of a function, such as copying, faxing, or scanning.
7
Cancel button
Cancel all printer activity.
8
Indicator light
Check the status of the printer.
9
USB port
Connect a flash drive to the printer.
Note: Only the front USB port supports flash drives.
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator
lights
The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition.
Understanding the printer control panel
17
Indicator light
Printer status
Off
The printer is off or in Hibernate mode.
Blinking green
The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
Solid green
The printer is on, but idle.
Blinking red
The printer requires user intervention.
Sleep button light
Printer status
Off
The printer is off, idle or in Ready state.
Solid amber
The printer is in Sleep mode.
Blinking amber
The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.
Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes
completely off for 1.9 seconds in a slow,
pulsing pattern
The printer is in Hibernate mode.
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the home screen
buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to
messages.
Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and
active embedded solutions.
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
7
13
8
12 11
Touch
10
9
To
1
Change Language
Launch the Change Language pop‑up window that lets you change the primary language of
the printer.
2
Copy
Access the Copy menus and make copies.
3
Fax
Access the Fax menus and send fax.
4
E-mail
Access the E-mail menus and send e‑mails.
5
FTP
Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server.
6
Arrows
Scroll up or down.
Understanding the printer control panel
Touch
18
To
7
Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms.
8
Menu icon
Access the printer menus.
Note: The menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state.
9
Bookmarks
Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and file links.
Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not from any
other application.
10
USB Drive
View, select, print, scan, or e‑mail photos and documents from a flash drive.
Note: This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or
flash drive is connected to the printer.
11
Held Jobs
12
Status/Supplies
Display all current held jobs.
• Show a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue
processing.
• Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to clear it.
13
Tips
Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.
14
Search Held Jobs
Search for one or more of the following items:
•
•
•
•
•
User name for held or confidential print jobs
Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
Profile names
Bookmark container or print job names
USB container or print job names for supported file types
Features
Feature
Description
Menu trail line
A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows the
path taken to arrive at the current menu.
Example:
Menus > Settings > Copy Settings >
Number of Copies
Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.
Attendance message alert
If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red
indicator light blinks.
Warning
If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
Number of Copies is not underlined because it is the current screen. If you touch an
underlined word on the “Number of Copies” screen before the number of copies is
set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the default
setting.
Understanding the printer control panel
Feature
19
Description
Status message bar
• Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
• Show printer conditions such as Toner Low or Cartridge Low.
• Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.
Printer IP address
The IP address of your network printer is located at the upper left corner of the
home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. You can
use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and
remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the
printer.
Example:
123.123.123.123
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary, depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
Touch
To
1
Arrows
View a list of options.
2
Copy It
Print a copy.
3
Advanced Options Select a copy option.
4
Home
Go to the home screen.
5
Increase
Select a higher value.
6
Decrease
Select a lower value.
7
Tips
Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.
Understanding the printer control panel
Other touch-screen buttons
Touch
To
Accept
Save a setting.
Cancel
Reset
• Cancel an action or a selection.
• Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Reset values on the screen.
20
Setting up and using the home screen applications
21
Setting up and using the home screen applications
Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and
active applications. Some applications are supported only in select printer models.
Finding the IP address of the printer
Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
You can find the printer IP address:
• From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Finding the IP address of the computer
For Windows users
1 In the Run dialog box, type cmd to open the command prompt.
2 Type ipconfig, and then look for the IP address.
For Macintosh users
1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, select Network.
2 Select your connection type, and then click Advanced > TCP/IP.
3 Look for the IP address.
Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even
when you are not physically near the printer.
1 Obtain the printer IP address:
• From the printer control panel home screen
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
3 Press Enter.
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
Setting up and using the home screen applications
22
Customizing the home screen
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Do one or more of the following:
• Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions.
a Click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
b Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen.
Note: If you clear a check box beside an icon, then the icon does not appear on the home screen.
c Click Submit.
• Customize the icon for an application. For more information, see “Finding information about the home screen
applications” on page 23 or see the documentation that came with the application.
Understanding the different applications
Use
To
Card Copy
Scan and print both sides of a card on a single page. For more information, see “Setting up Card Copy”
on page 23.
Fax
Scan a document, and then send it to a fax number. For more information, see “Faxing” on page
113.
Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen. For more
information, see “Setting up Forms and Favorites” on page 23.
Multi Send
Scan a document, and then send it to multiple destinations. For more information, see “Setting up
Multi Send” on page 25.
MyShortcut
Create shortcuts directly on the printer home screen. For more information, see “Using MyShortcut”
on page 24.
Scan to E‑mail
Scan a document, and then send it to an e‑mail address. For more information, see “E-mailing” on
page 106.
Scan to Computer
Scan a document, and then save it to a predefined folder on a host computer. For more information,
see “Setting up Scan to Computer” on page 140.
Scan to FTP
Scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. For more information, see “Scanning
to an FTP address” on page 138.
Scan to Network
Scan a document, and then send it to a network shared folder. For more information, see “Setting
up Scan to Network” on page 25.
Setting up and using the home screen applications
23
Activating the home screen applications
Finding information about the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you must first
activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on accessing the
Embedded Web Server, see “Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 21.
For detailed information on configuring and using the home screen applications, visit the Dell support Web site at
www.dell.com/support/printers.
Setting up Forms and Favorites
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User’s Guide, go to www.dell.com/support/manuals.
Use
To
Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly
from the printer home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the
bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and
firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that
came with your operating system.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Forms and Favorites.
3 Click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
• See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
• To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct, type the correct IP address of the host
computer where the bookmark is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host
computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 21.
• Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.
Setting up Card Copy
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User’s Guide, go to www.dell.com/support/manuals.
Setting up and using the home screen applications
Use
24
To
Quickly and easily copy insurance, identification, and other wallet‑size cards.
You can scan and print both sides of a card on a single page, saving paper and showing the information
on the card in a more convenient manner.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Card Copy.
3 Change the default scanning options, if necessary.
• Default tray—Select the default tray to be used for printing scan images.
• Default number of copies—Specify the number of copies that should automatically print when the application
is used.
• Default contrast setting—Specify a setting to increase or decrease the level of contrast when a copy of the
scanned card is printed. Select Best for Content if you want the printer to adjust the contrast automatically.
• Default scale setting—Set the size of the scanned card when printed. The default setting is 100% (full size).
• Resolution setting—Adjust the quality of the scanned card.
Notes:
– When scanning a card, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 200 dpi for color, and 400 dpi for
black and white.
– When scanning multiple cards, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 150 dpi for color, and
300 dpi for black and white.
• Print Borders—Select the check box to print the scan image with a border around it.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Card Copy on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions.
Using MyShortcut
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User’s Guide, go to www.dell.com/support/manuals.
Use
To
Create shortcuts on the printer home screen, with settings for up to 25 frequently used copy, fax, or email jobs.
To use the application, touch MyShortcut, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.
Setting up and using the home screen applications
25
Setting up Multi Send
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User’s Guide, go to www.dell.com/support/manuals.
Use
To
Scan a document, and then send the scanned document to multiple destinations.
Note: Make sure there is enough space in the printer hard disk.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The printer IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Multi Send.
3 From the Profiles section, click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
• See the mouse‑over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
• If you select FTP or Share Folder as a destination, then make sure the location settings of the destination are
correct. Type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located. For
more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the
computer” on page 21.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Multi Send on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the printer
display.
Setting up Scan to Network
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User’s Guide, go to www.dell.com/support/manuals.
Use
To
Scan a document and send it to a shared network folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder
destinations.
Notes:
• The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where the
destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a
write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.
• The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.
Setting up and using the home screen applications
26
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Do either of the following:
• Click Set up Scan to Network > Click here.
• Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Scan to Network.
3 Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
• See the mouse-over help beside some of the fields for a description of the setting.
• To make sure the location settings of the destination are correct, type the correct IP address of the host
computer where the specified destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of
the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 21.
• Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the specified destination is located.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the
printer display.
Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application enables you to interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near the network
printer. From your computer, you can view the printer status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other
print-related tasks.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Remote Operator Panel Settings.
3 Select the Enable check box, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Submit.
To use the application, click Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet.
Exporting and importing a configuration
You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 To export or import a configuration for one application, do the following:
a Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management.
b From the list of installed applications, click the name of the application you want to configure.
Setting up and using the home screen applications
27
c Click Configure, and then do either of the following:
• To export a configuration to a file, click Export, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to
save the configuration file.
Notes:
– When saving the configuration file, you can type a unique file name or use the default name.
– If a "JVM Out of Memory” error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration file is
saved.
• To import a configuration from a file, click Import, and then browse to the saved configuration file that was
exported from a previously configured printer.
Notes:
– Before importing the configuration file, you can choose to preview it first or load it directly.
– If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click Apply.
3 To export or import a configuration for multiple applications, do the following:
a Click Settings > Import/Export.
b Do either of the following:
• To export a configuration file, click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File, and then follow the instructions
on the computer screen to save the configuration file.
• To import a configuration file, do the following:
1 Click Import Embedded Solutions Settings File > Choose File, and then browse to the saved configuration
file that was exported from a previously configured printer.
2 Click Submit.
Additional printer setup
28
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Available internal options
Note: Some options are available only in select printer models. For more information, contact the place where you
purchased the printer.
• Memory card
– DDR3 DIMM
– Flash memory
• Fonts
• Firmware cards
– Forms barcode
– PRESCRIBE
– IPDS
– Printcryption
• Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
Accessing the controller board
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
Additional printer setup
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1 Open the controller board access cover.
2 Using a screwdriver, loosen the screws on the controller board shield.
29
Additional printer setup
30
3 Remove the shield.
4 Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or
connectors.
1
3
2
1
Internal Solutions Port or printer hard disk connector
2
Option card connector
3
Memory card connector
Additional printer setup
5 Reattach the shield, and then align the screws with the holes.
6 Tighten the screws on the shield.
31
Additional printer setup
7 Close the access cover.
Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic components or
connectors.
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the controller board.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 28.
2 Unpack the memory card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so may
cause damage.
32
Additional printer setup
33
3 Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.
1
2
4 Push the memory card straight into the connector, and then push the card toward the controller board wall until
it clicks into place.
5 Reattach the controller board shield, and then the controller board access cover.
Installing an optional card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then turn them
off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Additional printer setup
34
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 28.
2 Unpack the optional card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the controller board.
1
4 Push the card firmly into place as shown in the illustration.
2
Additional printer setup
35
Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the
controller board.
Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flushed against the controller board.
5 Close the controller board access door.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add
the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding
available options in the print driver” on page 51.
Installing an Internal Solutions Port
The controller board supports one optional Internal Solutions Port (ISP).
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic components or
connectors.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 28.
2 If a printer hard disk is installed, then remove the printer hard disk first.
For more information, see “Removing a printer hard disk” on page 43.
3 Unpack the ISP kit.
1
2
4
3
Additional printer setup
36
1
ISP solution
2
Screw for attaching the plastic bracket to the ISP
3
Screws for attaching the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board shield
4
Plastic bracket
4 Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening.
a Loosen the screw.
b Lift the metal cover, and then pull it out completely.
Additional printer setup
37
5 Align the posts of the plastic bracket to the holes on the controller board cage, and then press the plastic bracket
on the controller board cage until it clicks into place.
Note: Make sure that the plastic bracket has latched completely, and that the plastic bracket is seated firmly on
the cage.
6 Install the ISP on the plastic bracket.
Note: Hold the ISP at an angle over the plastic bracket so that any overhanging connectors will pass through the
ISP opening in the cage.
Additional printer setup
7 Lower the ISP toward the plastic bracket until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic bracket.
8 Use the provided thumbscrew for the ISP to attach the plastic bracket to the ISP.
Note: Turn the screw clockwise, enough to hold the ISP in place, but do not tighten it yet.
38
Additional printer setup
9 Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board shield.
10 Tighten the thumbscrew that is attached to the ISP.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not screw it on too tightly.
11 Connect the ISP solution interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color-coded.
Installing a printer hard disk
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
39
Additional printer setup
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 28.
2 Unpack the printer hard disk.
3 Locate the appropriate connector on the controller board cage.
Note: If an optional ISP is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP.
40
Additional printer setup
41
To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP:
a Remove the screws attached to the printer hard disk mounting bracket, and then remove the bracket.
b Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the ISP, and then press the printer hard disk down
until the standoffs are in place.
Installation warning: Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly. Do not touch or press on
the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage.
c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color‑coded.
Additional printer setup
42
To install a printer hard disk directly on the controller board cage:
a Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the controller board cage, and then press the printer
hard disk down until the standoffs are in place.
Installation warning: Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly. Do not touch or press on
the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage.
Additional printer setup
b Use the two provided screws to attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket.
c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color‑coded.
Removing a printer hard disk
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
43
Additional printer setup
44
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 28.
2 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the controller board, leaving the cable attached to the printer
hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before
pulling out the cable.
3 Remove the screws holding the printer hard disk in place.
Additional printer setup
45
4 Remove the printer hard disk.
5 Set aside the printer hard disk.
Installing hardware options
Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Install the printer and any hardware options you have purchased in the following order:
•
•
•
•
Caster base
2100‑sheet tray or spacer
Optional 550‑sheet tray
Printer
For more information on installing a caster base, optional 550‑sheet tray, spacer, or 2100‑sheet tray, see the setup
sheet that came with the option.
Additional printer setup
46
Installing optional trays
The printer supports the following optional input sources:
• 550‑sheet tray
• 2100‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, contact the place where you purchased the printer.
1 Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
2
1
2 Unpack the optional tray, and then remove all packing material.
3 Pull out the tray completely from the base.
Additional printer setup
47
4 Remove any packing material from inside the tray.
5 Insert the tray into the base.
6 Place the tray near the printer.
7 Lock the wheels of the caster base to secure the printer, then align the printer with the tray, and then slowly lower
the printer into place.
Note: Optional trays lock together when stacked.
1
8 Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Additional printer setup
48
1
2
Note: When the printer software and any optional trays are installed, you may need to manually add the
options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding available
options in the print driver” on page 51.
To uninstall the optional trays, slide the latch on the right side of the printer toward the front of the printer until
it clicks into place, and then remove stacked trays one at a time from the top to the bottom.
Attaching cables
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product
or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or to the network using an Ethernet cable.
Make sure to match the following:
• The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
• The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port
Additional printer setup
49
7
6
5
1
2
4
3
1
Use the
To
EXT port
Connect additional devices (telephone or answering machine) to the printer and
the telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax line for the
printer and if this connection method is supported in your country or region.
Note: Remove the plug to access the port.
2
LINE port
Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall jack
(RJ‑11), DSL filter, or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows you to access
the telephone line to send and receive faxes.
3
Printer power cord socket
Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
4
USB printer port
Connect the printer to a computer.
5
Ethernet port
Connect the printer to a network.
6
Internal Solutions Port (ISP) or
printer hard disk slot
Attach an ISP or a printer hard disk.
Note: If the printer has support
for wireless connection, then the
wireless antenna is attached
here.
7
USB port
Attach an optional wireless network adapter.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, or the printer in the area
shown while actively printing. Loss of data or a malfunction can occur.
Additional printer setup
Organizing cables
Attach the Ethernet cable and power cord, and then neatly tuck the cables in the channels at the back of the printer.
Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
2 Run the installer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
3 For Macintosh users, add the printer.
Note: Obtain the printer IP address from the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
50
Additional printer setup
51
Adding available options in the print driver
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
2 Open the printer properties, and then add or manually install any options.
3 Apply the changes.
For Macintosh users
1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer, and then select Options & Supplies >
Driver.
2 Add any installed hardware options.
3 Apply the changes.
Networking
Notes:
• Purchase a wireless network adapter first before setting up the printer on a wireless network. For more
information, contact the place where you purchased the printer.
• A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), Wi-Fi
Protected Access (WPA), and WPA2 are types of security used on a network.
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you begin:
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing the
printer.
•
•
•
•
A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
The network gateway
The network mask
A nickname for the printer (optional)
Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can choose to
use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.
You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can
physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a
damaged cable.
Additional printer setup
52
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
Notes:
• Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
• Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:
• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are
not sure which channel to select.
• Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
– WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key
currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.
– WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set
for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the
network.
– 802.1X–RADIUS
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:
•
•
•
•
Authentication type
Inner authentication type
802.1X user name and password
Certificates
– No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.
Notes:
– If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility
of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the
security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point, or contact
your system support person.
– To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that
came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your
system support person.
Additional printer setup
53
Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard
Before you begin, make sure that:
• A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
• An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.
• Active NIC is set to Auto. To set this to Auto, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Active NIC > Auto > Submit
Note: Make sure to turn off the printer, then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup
2 Select a wireless connection setup.
Use
To
Search for networks
Show available wireless connections.
Note: This menu item shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs.
Enter a network name Manually type the SSID.
Note: Make sure to type the correct SSID.
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup.
3 Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
Before you begin, make sure that:
• The access point (wireless router) is Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS) certified or WPS‑compatible. For more
information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
• A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly. For more information, see
the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
Using the Push Button Configuration method
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi‑Fi Protected
Setup > Start Push Button Method
2 Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Using the Personal Identification Number (PIN) method
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi‑Fi Protected
Setup > Start PIN Method
2 Copy the eight‑digit WPS PIN.
Additional printer setup
54
3 Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field.
Notes:
• The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
4 Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
5 Enter the eight‑digit PIN, and then save the setting.
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server
Before you begin, make sure that:
• Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network.
• A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless.
3 Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point (wireless router).
Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID, security method, preshared key or passphrase, network mode, and
channel.
4 Click Submit.
5 Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the Ethernet cable. Then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
6 To verify if your printer is connected to the network, print a network setup page. Then in the Network Card [x]
section, see if the status is Connected.
Changing port settings after installing a new network ISP
Notes:
• If the printer has a static IP address, then you do not need to make any changes.
• If the computers are configured to use the network name, instead of an IP address, then you do not need to
make any changes.
• If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection, then make sure
the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network.
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.
2 From the shortcut menu of the printer with the new ISP, open the printer properties.
Additional printer setup
55
3 Configure the port from the list.
4 Update the IP address.
5 Apply the changes.
For Macintosh users
1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to the list of printers, and then select + > IP.
2 Type the IP address in the address field.
3 Apply the changes.
Setting up serial printing
Use serial printing when the computer is far from the printer. After installing the serial or communication (COM) port,
configure the printer and the computer.
Note: Serial printing reduces print speed.
1 Set the parameters in the printer.
a From the control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.
b Locate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
c Save the settings.
2 From your computer, open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
3 Open the printer properties, and then select the COM port from the list.
4 Set the COM port parameters in Device Manager.
Use the Run dialog box to open the command prompt, and then type devmgmt.msc.
Verifying printer setup
When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up
correctly by printing the following:
• Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options
appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly.
Remove the option, and then install it again.
• Network setup page—If your printer has Ethernet or wireless capability and is attached to a network, then print a
network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids
network printing configuration.
Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Menu Settings Page
Additional printer setup
56
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page
2 Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.
Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Loading paper and specialty media
57
Loading paper and specialty media
The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information,
see “Avoiding jams” on page 248 and “Storing paper” on page 82.
Setting the paper size and type
From the home screen navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type >
Configuring Universal paper settings
Universal paper size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus.
Notes:
• The smallest supported Universal size is 70 x 127 mm (2.76 x 5 inches) for one‑sided printing and
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches) for two‑sided (duplex) printing.
• The largest supported Universal size is 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) for one‑sided and two‑sided printing.
• When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 inches) wide, the printer may print at a reduced speed after a
period of time to ensure the best print performance.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure
2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.
3 Select the width or height, and then touch Submit.
Loading the 550‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
1 Pull out the tray.
Notes:
• When loading folio‑, legal‑, or Oficio‑size paper, lift the tray slightly and pull it out completely.
• Avoid removing trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.
Loading paper and specialty media
58
1
2 Squeeze, and then slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading until it
clicks into place.
1
2
1
Note: Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Loading paper and specialty media
59
1
3 Unlock the length guide, and then squeeze and slide the guide to the correct position for the size of the paper you
are loading.
1
2
3
1
Notes:
• Lock the length guide for all paper sizes.
• Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Loading paper and specialty media
60
1
4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.
5 Load the paper stack with printable side facedown for one‑sided printing.
Note: Make sure paper or envelope is loaded properly.
One‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided (duplex) printing
Loading paper and specialty media
61
• Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
1
• If you are loading envelopes, then make sure that the flap side is facing up and the envelopes are on the left
side of the tray.
1
Loading paper and specialty media
• Make sure the paper is below the solid line, which is the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams.
62
Loading paper and specialty media
63
• When using card stock, labels, or other types of specialty media, make sure the paper is below the dashed line,
which is the alternate paper fill indicator.
6 For custom‑ or Universal‑size paper, adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack, and then lock
the length guide.
Loading paper and specialty media
64
7 Insert the tray.
1
8 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in
the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Loading the 2100‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
1 Pull out the tray completely.
2 Adjust the width and length guides.
Loading paper and specialty media
65
Loading A5‑size paper
a Pull up and slide the width guide to the position for A5.
1
2
b Squeeze, and then slide the length guide to the position for A5 until it clicks into place.
1
2
Loading paper and specialty media
66
c Remove the A5 length guide from its holder.
d Insert the A5 length guide into its designated slot.
1
2
Note: Press the A5 length guide until it clicks into place.
Loading A4‑, letter‑, legal‑, oficio‑, and folio‑size paper
a Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of paper you are loading.
1
2
Loading paper and specialty media
67
b If the A5 length guide is still attached to the length guide, then remove it from its place. If the A5 length guide
is not attached, then proceed to step d.
c Put the A5 length guide in its holder.
Loading paper and specialty media
68
d Squeeze, and then slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.
4 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown for one‑sided printing.
• Make sure the paper is loaded properly.
Loading paper and specialty media
69
One‑sided printing
Two‑sided (duplex) printing
C
AB
C
AB
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams.
5 Insert the tray.
Note: Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray.
Loading paper and specialty media
70
6 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in
the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Loading the multipurpose feeder
1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
Note: Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing.
Loading paper and specialty media
2 Pull the multipurpose feeder extender.
Note: Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.
3 Slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading.
Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
71
Loading paper and specialty media
72
4 Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading.
• Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.
• Hold transparencies by the edges, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.
• Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
5 Load the paper or specialty media.
Loading paper and specialty media
73
Note: Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.
• Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time.
• Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder, lies flat, and is not bent or wrinkled.
One‑sided (simplex) printing
Two‑sided (duplex) printing
• Load envelopes with the flap side down and on the left of the multipurpose feeder.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
• Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the feeder can cause paper jams.
Loading paper and specialty media
74
6 For custom- or Universal- size paper, adjust the width guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack.
7 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the
tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Linking and unlinking trays
When the paper size and paper type for any trays are the same, the printer will link those trays. When one linked tray
becomes empty, paper will feed from the next linked tray. We recommend giving all unique paper, such as letterhead
and different colored plain papers, a different custom type name so that the trays they are in will not automatically
link.
Linking and unlinking trays
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu.
Loading paper and specialty media
3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.
• To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
• To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.
4 Click Submit.
Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more information,
see “Setting the paper size and type” on page 57.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer.
The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are
not properly configured.
Creating a custom name for a paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
4 Click Submit.
5 Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Names
2 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
3 Touch Submit.
4 Touch Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Assigning a custom paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
75
Loading paper and specialty media
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types
2 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
3 Touch Submit.
76
Paper and specialty media guide
77
Paper and specialty media guide
Notes:
• Make sure the paper size, type, and weight are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
• Flex, fan, and straighten specialty media before loading them.
• The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
Using specialty media
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,
and texture, can significantly affect print quality.
• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the card
stock loaded in the tray.
• Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Specify the paper texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
• Preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper feed
problems.
• Before loading the card stock on the tray, flex and fan the card stock to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a
level surface.
Tips on using envelopes
• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
envelopes loaded in the tray.
•
•
•
•
•
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers.
For best performance, use envelopes made from 90‑g/m2 (24‑lb) paper or 25% cotton.
Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Have excessive curl or twist.
Are stuck together or damaged in any way.
Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing.
Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars.
Have an interlocking design.
Have postage stamps attached.
Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position.
Have bent corners.
Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes.
Paper and specialty media guide
78
• Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
• Before loading the envelopes on the tray, flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and
then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.
Tips on using labels
• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the labels
loaded in the tray.
•
•
•
•
Print samples on labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Use labels designed specifically for laser printers.
Do not use labels with slick backing material.
Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and toner cartridge
warranties.
• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
• Before loading labels on the tray, flex and fan labels to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Tips on using letterhead
•
•
•
•
Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Before loading letterhead, flex and fan the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.
Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead.
Source
Printing
Printable side
Paper orientation
Trays
One‑sided
Facedown
Load the sheet with the
top edge toward the front
of the tray.
Trays
Two‑sided
Faceup
Load the sheet with the
bottom edge entering the
printer first.
Multipurpose feeder
One‑sided
Faceup
Load the sheet with the
top edge entering the
printer first.
Multipurpose feeder
Two‑sided
Facedown
Load the sheet with the
bottom edge entering the
printer first.
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the preprinted letterhead is acceptable for laser
printers.
Paper and specialty media guide
79
Tips on using transparencies
• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
transparencies loaded in the tray.
•
•
•
•
•
Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers.
Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems.
Before loading transparencies, flex and fan the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.
When printing on large volumes of transparencies, make sure to print by batches of only up to 20 with an interval
of at least three minutes between batches, to prevent the transparencies from sticking together in the bin. You can
also remove transparencies from the bin by batches of 20.
Paper guidelines
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these factors before printing on them:
Weight
The printer trays and multipurpose feeder can automatically feed paper weights between 60–176 g/m2 (16–47‑lb) grain
long paper. The 2100‑sheet tray can automatically feed paper weights up to 60–135 g/m2 (16–36‑lb) grain long paper.
Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, and may cause jams.
Note: Two‑sided printing is supported for 60–176 g/m2 (16–47‑lb) paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after
the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid,
cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding
problems.
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too
smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points;
smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that
can degrade its performance.
Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing. Extend
the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment. Thick
paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Paper and specialty media guide
80
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60–176 g/m2 (16–47‑lb) paper, grain long paper is recommended.
Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the
paper with a high degree of stability, resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing
fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.
Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:
• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on
the paper package.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
•
•
•
•
Use grain long for 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) paper.
Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these
requirements; latex inks might not.
• Print samples on preprinted forms and letterheads considered for use before buying large quantities. This
determines whether or not the ink in the preprinted form or letterhead will affect print quality.
• When in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
Using recycled paper and other office papers
As an environmentally conscientious company, we support the use of recycled paper produced specifically for use in
laser (electrophotographic) printers.
While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well, we consistently test papers that represent
recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market. This scientific testing is conducted with rigor and
discipline. Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole, including the following:
•
•
•
•
Amount of post-consumer waste (We test up to 100% post-consumer waste content.)
Temperature and humidity conditions (Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world.)
Moisture content (Business papers should have low moisture: 4–5%.)
Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer.
Paper and specialty media guide
•
•
•
•
81
Thickness (impacts how much can be loaded into a tray)
Surface roughness (measured in Sheffield units, impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper)
Surface friction (determines how easily sheets can be separated)
Grain and formation (impacts curling, which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves
through the printer)
• Brightness and texture (look and feel)
Recycled papers are better than ever; however, the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control
over foreign matter. And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner,
they are not perfect. The energy required to de-ink and deal with additives such as colorants and “glue” often generates
more carbon emissions than does normal paper production. However, using recycled papers enables better resource
management overall.
We concern ourselves with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products. To
gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment, the company commissioned a number of
life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor (up to 80%) of carbon emissions
caused throughout the entire life of a device (from design to end-of-life). This is due to the energy-intensive
manufacturing processes required to make paper.
Thus, we seek to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper. Using recycled paper is one way.
Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another. We are well-equipped to help customers
minimize printing and copying waste. In addition, the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers who
demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices.
We do not endorse specific suppliers, although a converter’s product list for special applications is maintained. However,
the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing:
1 Minimize paper consumption.
2 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber. Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry
Stewardship Council (FSC) or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC). These certifications
guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and
socially responsible forest management and restoration practices.
3 Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs: normal 75 or 80 g/m2 certified paper, lower weight paper,
or recycled paper.
Unacceptable paper examples
Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers:
•
•
•
•
Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers
•
•
•
•
•
Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise location on the page) greater than ± 2.3 mm (± 0.9 in.),
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software
application to successfully print on these forms.)
Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European testing)
Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
Multiple part forms or documents
Paper and specialty media guide
82
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent. Most
label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative humidity
between 40 and 60 percent.
•
•
•
•
Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
Store individual packages on a flat surface.
Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and wrapper
help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the sizes, types, and weights of
paper they support.
Note: For an unlisted paper size, select the closest larger listed size.
Paper sizes supported by the printer
Note: When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 inches) wide, the printer may print at a reduced speed after a
period of time to ensure the best print performance.
Paper size1
Dimensions
Standard or
2100‑sheet tray Multipurpose
optional
feeder
550‑sheet tray
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)
A5
148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 in.)
A6
105 x 148 mm
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)
X
JIS B5
182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)
X
Letter
216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
Legal
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
Duplex
ADF
Scanner
glass
2
1
If your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel, then you may select common paper sizes
that correspond to the position of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size/Type menu. If the paper size is not
available, then select Universal or turn off tray size sensing. For more information, contact technical support.
2
3
Paper is supported in long‑edge orientation.
Universal is supported in ADF only if the width is from 76 mm (3 in.) to 216 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is from 127 mm
(5 in.) to 356 mm (14 in.).
Paper and specialty media guide
83
Paper size1
Dimensions
Executive
184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)
Oficio (México)
216 x 340 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
Folio
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
Statement
140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
X
Universal
105 x 148 mm to
216 x 356 mm
(4.13 x 5.83 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
X
70 x 127 mm to
216 x 356 mm
(2.76 x 5 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
Standard or
2100‑sheet tray Multipurpose
optional
feeder
550‑sheet tray
Duplex
ADF
Scanner
glass
X
X
X
X
3
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)
98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)
X
X
X
9 Envelope
98 x 225 mm
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)
X
X
X
10 Envelope
105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)
X
X
X
DL Envelope
110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)
X
X
X
C5 Envelope
162 x 229 mm
(6.38 x 9.01 in.)
X
X
X
B5 Envelope
176 x 250 mm
(6.93 x 9.84 in.)
X
X
X
Other Envelope
98 x 162 mm
(3.9 x 6.4 in.) to
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
X
X
X
1
If your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel, then you may select common paper sizes
that correspond to the position of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size/Type menu. If the paper size is not
available, then select Universal or turn off tray size sensing. For more information, contact technical support.
2
Paper is supported in long‑edge orientation.
3
Universal is supported in ADF only if the width is from 76 mm (3 in.) to 216 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is from 127 mm
(5 in.) to 356 mm (14 in.).
Paper types and weights supported by the printer
The printer engine supports 60–176‑g/m2 (16–47‑lb) paper weights.
Paper and specialty media guide
84
Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.
Paper type
550‑sheet tray 2100‑sheet
tray
Multipurpose
feeder
Duplex
ADF
Scanner glass
Paper
Card Stock
X
Plain Envelope
X
X
X
Rough Envelope
X
X
X
Paper Labels
X
X
Pharmacy Labels
X
Transparencies*
X
*
X
X
Print transparencies in batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information, see “Tips
on using transparencies” on page 79.
Printing
85
Printing
Printing forms and a document
Printing forms
Use the Forms and Favorites application to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that
is regularly printed. Before you can use this application, first set it up on the printer. For more information, see “Setting
up Forms and Favorites” on page 23.
1 From the printer home screen, navigate to:
Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings
2 Depending on your printer model, touch
,
, or Submit.
Printing a document
1 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.
2 Send the print job:
For Windows users
a With a document open, click File > Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
c Adjust the settings, if necessary.
d Click OK > Print.
For Macintosh users
a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.
3 Click OK.
b Customize the settings in the Print dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the Print dialog and pop‑up menus, adjust the settings if necessary.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or
select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3 Click Print.
Adjusting toner darkness
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Printing
86
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3 Adjust the toner darkness, and then click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness
2 Adjust the setting, and then touch Submit.
Printing from a flash drive
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:
• Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer control
panel.
• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
Notes:
• A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted.
Printing
87
• If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the
printer ignores the flash drive.
• If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears on the printer
display. After these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents
from the flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, any connector, the
memory device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory
device. Loss of data can occur.
2 From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3 Touch the arrows to get a preview of the document.
4 Use
or
to specify the number of copies to be printed, and then touch Print.
Notes:
• Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
• If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then touch Held Jobs on
the home screen to print files from the flash drive.
Supported flash drives and file types
Notes:
• High‑speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not supported.
• USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New Technology
File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.
Printing
88
Recommended flash drives
File type
Many flash drives are tested and approved for use with the printer. For more information, visit Documents:
www.dell.com/support/printers.
• .pdf
• .xps
Images:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
.dcx
.gif
.jpeg or .jpg
.bmp
.pcx
.tiff or .tif
.png
.fls
Printing from a mobile device
Printing from a mobile device using AirPrint
AirPrintTM is a mobile printing application that allows you to print directly from your iPad® (all models), iPhone® (3GS
or later), or iPod touch® (3rd generation or later) to your AirPrint‑enabled printer. AirPrint‑enabled printers work with
these mobile devices that run the latest version of iOS.
Note: Make sure the printer and the mobile device share the same wireless network. For information on configuring
the wireless settings of your mobile device, see the documentation that came with the device.
1 From the home screen of your mobile device, launch the application.
Note: You can print any content from these Apple applications: iBook, Mail, Photos, Safari, and some select App
Store applications.
2 Select the item to print, and then tap
.
3 Tap Print, and then choose your printer.
4 Set the print options you want, and then tap Print.
Printing from a mobile device using Dell Mobile Print
You can print directly from an Android mobile device (OS 2.1 or later) to your printer using Dell Mobile Print.
Notes:
• Make sure the printer and the mobile device share the same wireless network.
Printing
89
• For information on configuring the wireless settings, see the documentation that came with your mobile device.
1 From Google Play, download the Dell Mobile Print application.
2 From the home screen of your mobile device, tap
.
3 Select the item to print.
You can choose from the list of supported applications (such as Calendar, Contacts, Gallery, Google Docs, GMail,
Internet, Messaging, Word Documents, Excel Documents, PowerPoint Documents, and PDF Documents).
4 From the print preview dialog, set the print and printer options if necessary.
Note: If your printer does not appear in the list, then check the network settings of both your printer and your
mobile device to make sure that both share the same wireless network.
5 Tap Print.
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Security > Confidential Print > select the print job type
Use
To
Max Invalid PIN
Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN
are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration
Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control
panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 1–9.
Repeat Job Expiration
Print and store print jobs in the printer memory.
Verify Job Expiration
Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies. It allows you to
examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is automatically deleted
from the printer memory when all copies are printed.
Reserve Job Expiration
Store print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Notes:
• Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
• You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer
control panel.
• All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
Printing
90
2 Touch Submit.
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve
jobs are held in the printer until you delete them.
For Windows users
1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click Print and Hold.
4 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
5 Click OK or Print.
6 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
For Macintosh users
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop‑up menu, choose Job Routing.
3 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
4 Click OK or Print.
5 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
Modifying confidential print settings
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Printing
91
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings tab > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
3 Modify the settings:
• Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds a specific number of PIN entry attempts,
all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
• Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within the specified time,
all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
4 Save the modified settings.
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press
on the keypad.
2 Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press
on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
2 From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
Printing
For Macintosh users
1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer.
2 From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
92
Copying
93
Copying
Scanner glass
A
B
C
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small
items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper,
or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Making copies
Making a quick copy
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy paper are
the same.
3 From the printer control panel, press
.
Copying using the ADF
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 Adjust the paper guides.
Copying
94
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It
Copying using the scanner glass
1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It
If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the next
page.
3 Touch Finish the Job.
Copying photos
1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content > Photo >
3 From the Content Source menu, navigate to:
Photo/Film >
> Copy It
Note: If you have more photos to copy, then place the next photo on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the
next page.
4 Touch Finish the Job.
Copying on specialty media
Copying on transparencies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
Copying
95
3 Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray that contains transparencies > Copy It
If there are no trays that contain transparencies, then navigate to:
Manual Feeder >
> select the size of the transparencies >
> Transparency >
4 Load transparencies into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.
Copying on letterhead
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4 Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray containing the letterhead > Copy It
5 If there are no trays that support letterhead, then navigate to:
Manual Feeder > select the size of the letterhead > Letterhead
6 Load the letterhead faceup, top edge first into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.
Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, touch Copy.
2 Adjust the copy settings, and then touch Save as Shortcut.
Note: If you change the settings after the copy shortcut has been created, then the settings are not saved.
3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4 Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Notes:
• The shortcut name appears in the Copy Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
• You can use the shortcut when copying another document using the same settings.
Copying
96
Customizing copy settings
Copying to a different size
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4 Navigate to:
Copy to > select a new size for the copy >
> Copy It
Making copies using paper from a selected tray
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4 Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray containing the paper type you want to use >
5 Touch Copy It.
Copying different paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the “Copy
to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper
size (Example 2).
Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Copying
97
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >
4 Navigate to:
Copy to > Auto Size Match >
> Copy It
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes
corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.
Example 2: Copying on a single paper size
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >
4 Navigate to:
Copy to > Letter >
> Copy It
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on
the paper size selected.
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Copying
98
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Sides (Duplex) > select the preferred duplexing method
Note: For the preferred duplexing method, the first number represents sides of the original documents while
the second number represents sides of the copy. For example, select “2 sided to 2 sided” if you have two-sided
original documents and you want two‑sided copies.
4 Touch
> Copy It.
Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be scaled from 25% to 400% of the original document size.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Copy.
4 From the Scale area, touch
or
to decrease or increase the value by 1%.
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. This automatically adjusts the scan image of the original document to
fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
5 Touch Copy It.
Adjusting copy quality
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content
4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying.
• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
Copying
99
5 Touch
.
6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying.
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from a film.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
7 Touch
> Copy It.
Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print the copies as a set (collated) or to print the
copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated
Not collated
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > select the preferred order of pages >
> Copy It
Placing separator sheets between copies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Copying
100
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets
Note: Set Collate to “1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3” to place separator sheets between copies. If Collate is set to “1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2,”
then the separator sheets are added to the end of the copy job. For more information, see “Collating copies” on
page 99.
4 Select one of the following:
• Between Copies
• Between Jobs
• Between Pages
• Off
5 Touch
> Copy It.
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto a single
sheet of paper.
Notes:
• Make sure to set the paper size to letter, legal, A4, or JIS B5.
• Make sure to set the copy size to 100%.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Paper Saver > select the output you want >
> Copy It
Note: If Paper Saver is set to Off, then the Print Page Borders option is unavailable.
Creating a custom copy job
The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each
set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the
scanner scans the first set of original documents using the specified settings, and then it scans the next set with the
same or different settings.
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:
• If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.
• If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF tray becomes empty.
• If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.
Copying
101
For example:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Custom Job > On >
> Copy It
Note: When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.
4 Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch
Scan from automatic feeder or Scan from flatbed.
Note: Change the scan job settings, if necessary.
5 If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.
Placing information on copies
Placing a header or footer on pages
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer > select where you want to place the header or footer > select the type
of header or footer you want
4 Enter the required information depending on the header or footer you selected, and then touch Done.
5 Touch
, and then press
.
Placing an overlay message on each page
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom, and
Draft.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Copying
102
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Overlay > select overlay message > Done > Copy It
Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the original document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel.
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
From the home screen, touch Cancel Job.
Canceling appears on the display. When the job is canceled, the Copy screen appears.
Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed
1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press
on the keypad.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press
on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
Understanding the copy options
Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can select the paper size of the original document.
• Touch the paper size that matches the original document.
• To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width, touch Mixed Sizes.
• To set the printer to automatically detect the size of the original document, touch Auto Size Sense.
Copying
103
Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.
• Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
• If the settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting
to accommodate the difference.
• If the paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, then touch Manual Feeder,
and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder.
• When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the paper size of the original document. If a matching
paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper in a
tray or multipurpose feeder.
Scale
This option lets you scale the document from 25% to 400% of the original document size. You can also set automatic
scaling.
• When copying to a different paper size, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, set the “Copy from” and “Copy
to” paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
• To decrease or increase the value by 1%, touch
or
on the printer control panel. To make a continuous
decrease or increase in value, hold the button for two seconds or more.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document.
Sides (Duplex)
This option lets you make one- or two-sided copies from one- or two-sided original documents.
Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document.
Copies
This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
•
•
•
•
Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Copying
104
Select from the following content sources:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
• Advanced Duplex—This specifies the document orientation, whether documents are one-sided or two-sided, and
how documents are bound.
• Advanced Imaging—This changes or adjusts Auto Center, Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout,
Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings
before you copy the document.
• Create Booklet—This creates a booklet. You can choose between one‑sided and two‑sided.
Note: This option appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
• Cover Page Setup—This sets up the cover page of copies and booklets.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Header/Footer—This inserts date or time, page number, Bates number, or custom text, and then prints them in
the specified header or footer location.
• Margin Shift—This increases or reduces the size of the margin of a page by shifting the scanned image. Touch
or
to set the margin you want. If the additional margin is too large, then the copy will be cropped.
• Overlay—This creates a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose from
Urgent, Confidential, Copy, and Draft, or you can enter a custom message in the ”Enter custom text” field. The word
you pick will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.
• Paper Saver—This prints two or more pages of an original document on the same page. Paper Saver is also called
N-up printing where N stands for the number of pages. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document
on a single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page.
Copying
105
• Separator Sheets—This places a blank sheet of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator sheets
can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are
printed on.
• Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then displays an
error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
E-mailing
106
E-mailing
Scanner glass
A
B
C
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small
items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper,
or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Setting up the printer to e-mail
Setting up the e-mail function
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.
Configuring e‑mail settings
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.
E-mailing
107
Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings.
3 From the Other Settings column, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4 Type a unique name for the e‑mail recipient, and then type the e‑mail address. If you are entering multiple addresses,
then separate each address with a comma.
5 Click Add.
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient > type an e‑mail address
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.
2 Touch Subject, then type the e‑mail subject, and then touch Done.
3 Touch Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.
4 Adjust the e‑mail settings.
Note: If you change the settings after the e‑mail shortcut has been created, then the settings are not saved.
5 Touch
.
6 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
7 Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Notes:
• The shortcut name appears in the E-mail Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
• You can use the shortcut when e‑mailing another document using the same settings.
E-mailing
108
E-mailing a document
You can use the printer to e‑mail scanned documents to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can type the
e‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut
application from the printer home screen. For more information, see “Activating the home screen applications” on
page 23.
Sending an e-mail using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure that the size of the original document and the copy paper size are
the same.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s)
4 Type the e‑mail address, or press # using the keypad, and then enter the shortcut number.
Notes:
• To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want
to add.
• You can also enter an e‑mail address using the address book.
5 Touch Done > Send It.
Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press #, then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch
.
Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number that
you want to add.
4 Touch Send It.
E-mailing
109
Sending an e‑mail using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) >
> type the name of the recipient > Search
4 Touch the name of the recipient.
Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number that
you want to add, or search the address book.
5 Touch Done.
Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > Done
4 Touch Subject, then type the e‑mail subject, and then touch Done.
5 Touch Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.
Changing the output file type
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
E-mailing
110
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > Done > Send as
4 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.
• PDF—Create a single file with multiple pages.
• Secure PDF—Create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web
browsers and graphics programs.
• XPS—Create a single XML Paper Specification (XPS) file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet
Explorer‑hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third‑party standalone viewer.
5 Touch
> Send It.
Note: If you selected Secure PDF, then you will be prompted to enter your password twice.
Canceling an e-mail
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears, or while Scan the Next Page /
Finish the Job appears.
Understanding the e-mail options
Recipient(s)
This option lets you enter the recipient of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e‑mail addresses.
Subject
This option lets you type a subject line for your e-mail.
Message
This option lets you type a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.
File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
E-mailing
111
Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to e‑mail. When Original Size is set to Mixed
Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark your scanned documents are in relation to the original document.
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file
size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
•
•
•
•
Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
• PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages.
Note: PDF is the factory default setting.
• Secure PDF—Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document.
• XPS—Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
E-mailing
112
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.
This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned,
the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you
e‑mail the document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then displays an
error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
Faxing
113
Faxing
Scanner glass
A
B
C
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small
items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper,
or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Setting up the printer to fax
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
Notes:
• The following connection methods are applicable only in select countries or regions.
• During the initial printer setup, clear the fax function check box and any other function you plan to set up later,
and then press Continue.
• The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or
receiving a fax.
Faxing
114
Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom
of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: fax name (identification of the business, other entity,
or individual sending the message) and fax number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business, other
entity, or individual).
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web
Server and then enter the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup
information.
Using the printer control panel for fax setup
When the printer is turned on for the first time, a series of start‑up screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities,
then the Fax Name and Fax Number screens appear.
1 When the Fax Name screen appears, do the following:
a Enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
b Enter the fax name, and then touch Submit.
2 When the Fax Number screen appears, enter the fax number, and then touch Submit.
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4 In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.
Faxing
115
Choosing a fax connection
Scenario 1: Standard telephone line
Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line
To connect:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
port of the printer.
Faxing
116
Tips for this setup:
• You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On) or manually (Auto Answer Off).
• If you want to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), then set the printer to pick up on any number of rings
that you want.
Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine
Connected to the same telephone wall jack
PHONE
LINE
To connect:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the answering machine to the
port of the printer.
port of the printer.
Faxing
117
Connected to different wall jacks
PHONE
LINE
To connect:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the
port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
Tips for this setup:
• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes automatically
(Auto Answer On).
• Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering machine picks
up calls after four rings, then set the printer to pick up after six rings. This way, the answering machine picks up
calls first and your voice calls are received. If the call is a fax, then the printer detects the fax signal on the line and
takes over the call.
• If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service provided by your telephone company, then make sure that you set the
correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive
faxes automatically.
Faxing
118
Setup 3: Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service
02
To connect:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the
port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the telephone to the
port of the printer.
Tips for this setup:
• This setup works best if you subscribe to a distinctive ring service. If you have distinctive ring service, then make
sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you
have set it to receive faxes automatically.
• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes manually
(Auto Answer Off).
When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones, press *9* or the manual answer code on the telephone
to receive the fax.
• You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), but you need to turn off the voice
mail service when you are expecting a fax. This setting works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax.
Faxing
119
Scenario 2: Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
A Digital Subscriber Line splits your regular telephone line into two channels: voice and Internet. Telephone and fax
signals travel through the voice channel, and Internet signals pass through the other channel. This way, you can use
the same line for analog voice calls (including faxes) and digital Internet access.
To minimize interference between the two channels and ensure a quality connection, you need to install a DSL filter
for the analog devices (fax machine, telephone, answering machine) in your network. Interference causes noise and
static on the telephone, failed and poor quality faxes for the printer, and slow Internet connection on your computer.
To install a filter for the printer:
1 Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack.
2 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the
port of the printer. Connect the other
end to the phone port on the DSL filter.
3 To continue using a computer for Internet access, connect the computer to the DSL HPN port on the DSL filter.
4 To connect a telephone to the printer, remove any installed adapter plug from the
connect the telephone to the port.
port of the printer, and then
Faxing
120
Scenario 3: VoIP telephone service
To connect:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the
port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost
for activation of the second phone port.
3 Connect the telephone to the
port of the printer.
Faxing
121
Tips for this setup:
• To make sure that the phone port on the VoIP adapter is active, plug an analog telephone into the phone port, and
then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.
• If you need two phone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the printer
into the second phone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the port labeled Phone Line
1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.
Note: Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct
splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.
Scenario 4: Digital telephone service through a cable provider
Setup 1: Printer is connected directly to a cable modem
Faxing
122
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the
port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost
for activation of the second phone port.
3 Connect your analog telephone phone to the
port of the printer.
Notes:
• To make sure that the telephone port on the cable modem is active, plug an analog telephone into the
telephone port, and then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.
• If you need two telephone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the
printer into the second telephone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line
1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.
• Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct splitter, plug
an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.
Setup 2: Printer is connected to a wall jack; cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the
port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3 Connect your analog telephone to the
port of the printer.
Faxing
123
Scenario 5: Countries or regions with different telephone wall jacks and plugs
Some countries or regions may have different types of telephone wall jack connectors than those that came with the
printer. The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ-11. Your printer comes with the RJ-11 jack
and a telephone cable with the RJ-11 plug.
If the wall jack or equipment in your facility is not compatible with this type of connection, then you need to use a
telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or region may not come with your printer, and you may need to
purchase it separately.
There may be an adapter plug installed in the
port of the printer. If you are using a telephone adapter or a facility
port of the printer.
that has a cascaded or serial wiring scheme, then do not remove the adapter plug from the
Faxing
124
Connecting the printer to a non‑RJ‑11 wall jack
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with printer to the
port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.
3 If you want to connect another device (telephone or answering machine) to the same wall jack, and if the device
has a non‑RJ‑11 connector, then connect it directly to the telephone adapter.
Notes:
• The
the
port of the printer may have an adapter plug for use with the adapter. Do not remove the plug from
port of the printer.
• In some countries or regions, the printer may not come with a telephone adapter or an adapter plug.
Faxing
125
Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany
The German wall jack has two kinds of ports. The N ports are for fax machines, modems, and answering machines. The
F port is for telephones.
N F N
Faxing
126
Connect the printer to any of the N ports.
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came the printer to the
port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the RJ‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to an N port.
3 If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack, then connect the devices as
shown.
Note: Do not remove the adapter plug from the
telephone system.
port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded
Faxing
127
Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone company. This service lets you have multiple telephone
numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be useful for
distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these steps to
connect the equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3 Change the distinctive rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer.
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This sets the printer to answer single, double, and
triple ring patterns.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Answer On
b Select the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch Submit.
Setting the outgoing fax name and number
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4 In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.
Faxing
128
Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 In the Manually Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
4 Click Submit.
Note: It is recommended to use the network time.
Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 Select the Automatically Observe DST check box, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time
Zone Setup section.
4 Click Submit.
Sending a fax
You can use the printer to send a fax to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can type the e‑mail address,
use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut application from the
printer home screen. For more information, see “Activating the home screen applications” on page 23.
Sending a fax using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Faxing
129
3 From the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut.
Note: To add recipients, touch Next number, and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut
number, or search the address book.
5 Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the computer
The printer driver fax option lets you send a print job to the printer, which sends the job as a fax. The fax option works
as a normal fax machine, but is controlled through the printer driver instead of the printer control panel.
1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Navigate to:
Fax tab > Enable fax
4 Enter the recipient fax number or numbers in the “Fax number(s)” field.
Note: Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature
5 If necessary, enter a prefix in the “Dialing prefix” field.
6 Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation.
7 If you want to include a cover page with the fax, then select Include cover page with fax, and then enter the
appropriate information.
8 Click OK.
Notes:
• The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For information on
installing these drivers, see the Software and Documentation CD.
• The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under the Configuration tab before it
can be used.
• If the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected, then you are prompted to verify the
recipient information before the fax is sent. If this check box is cleared, then the queued document is sent
automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab.
Sending a fax using a shortcut number
Fax shortcuts are like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or a fax machine. A shortcut number (1–999) can contain
a single recipient or multiple recipients.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Faxing
130
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
4 Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the address book
The address book lets you search for bookmarks and network directory servers. For more information on enabling the
address book feature, contact your system support person.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax >
> type the name of the recipient > Search
Note: You can search only for one name at a time.
4 Touch the name of the recipient, and then touch Fax It.
Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options > Delayed Send
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, then the Delayed Send button does not appear. Faxes waiting for
transmission are listed in the fax queue.
4 Specify the time the fax will be transmitted, and then touch
.
5 Touch Fax It.
Note: The document is scanned, and then faxed at the scheduled time.
Faxing
131
Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a shortcut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support
person.
3 Type a name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
Notes:
• To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
• Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
4 Assign a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5 Click Add.
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
Note: To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.
2 Touch
.
3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Note: If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Faxing
132
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4 From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to select the resolution you want.
Note: Select a resolution from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (best quality at a reduced speed).
5 Touch Fax It.
Making a fax lighter or darker
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4 Adjust the fax darkness, and then touch Fax It.
Viewing a fax log
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Reports.
3 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.
Blocking junk faxes
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Faxing
133
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.
Notes:
• This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or have no fax name.
• In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or type the fax names of specific fax callers you want
to block.
Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears or while
Scan the Next Page and Finish the Job appear.
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory
1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.
2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the
job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.
Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or
at a scheduled day or time.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.
Faxing
134
3 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
• Off
• Always On
• Manual
• Scheduled
4 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
5 Click Add.
Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select Print, Print and Forward, or Forward.
4 From the “Forward to” menu, select Fax, E‑mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF.
5 In the “Forward to Shortcut” field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.
6 Click Submit.
Understanding the fax options
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Select from the following content types:
•
•
•
•
Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Faxing
135
Select from the following content sources:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the
time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Select one of the following:
•
•
•
•
Standard—Use this when faxing most documents.
Fine 200 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with small prints.
Super fine 300 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with fine details.
Ultra fine 600 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with pictures or photos.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on one side or on both sides of the page (duplex).
This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Delayed Send
This option lets you send a fax at a later time or date.
Faxing
136
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image,
Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you fax the
document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then shows an
error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
Scanning
137
Scanning
Using Scan to Network
Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support person. After
the destinations (shared network folders) have been established on the network, the setup process for the application
involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using its Embedded Web Server. For more
information, see “Setting up Scan to Network” on page 25.
Scanning to an FTP address
Scanner glass
A
B
C
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small
items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper,
or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be
sent to the server at a time.
When an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes
available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination could also be
another PostScript printer; for example, a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer.
Creating shortcuts
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to
an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for
creating shortcut numbers: using the Embedded Web Server and using the printer control panel.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Scanning
138
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Navigate to:
Settings > Other Settings area > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcut Setup
3 Enter the appropriate information.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support
person.
4 Enter a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5 Click Add.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address >
> type a name for the shortcut > Done
2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Notes:
• If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
• If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
Scanning to an FTP address
You can use the printer to send scanned documents to an FTP address in a number of ways. You can type the FTP
address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send, Scan to Network, or
MyShortcut application from the printer home screen. For more information, see “Activating the home screen
applications” on page 23.
Scanning to an FTP address using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Done > Send It
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Scanning
139
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press # on the keypad, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4 Touch
> Send It.
Scanning an FTP using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP >
> type the name of the recipient > Search
4 Touch the name of the recipient.
Note: To search for additional recipients, touch New Search, and then type the name of the next recipient.
5 Touch
> Send It.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
Scanner glass
A
B
C
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small
items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper,
or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Scanning
140
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be directly
connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images. You can scan the document back to the computer over
the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer.
Scanning to a computer using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Scan Profile > Create Scan Profile.
3 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scan image.
5 Type a scan name, and then a user name.
Note: The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.
6 Click Submit.
Note: Clicking Submit automatically assigns a shortcut number. You can use this shortcut number when you are
ready to scan your documents.
7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
b If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
c Do either of the following:
• Press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
• From the home screen, navigate to:
Held Jobs > Profiles > select your shortcut on the list
Note: The scanner scans and sends the document to the directory you specified.
8 View the file from the computer.
Note: The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.
Setting up Scan to Computer
Notes:
• This feature is supported only in Windows Vista or later.
• Make sure your computer and printer are connected to the same network.
Scanning
141
1 Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
Note: If your printer is not in the list, then add your printer.
2 Open the printer properties, and then adjust the settings as necessary.
3 From the control panel, touch Scan to Computer > select the appropriate scan setting > Send It.
Scanning to a flash drive
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
Note: The USB Drive home screen appears.
4 Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.
Note: The printer goes back to the home screen after 30 seconds of inactivity.
5 Adjust the scan settings, and then touch Scan It.
Understanding the scan options
FTP
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
File Name
This option lets you type a file name for the scan image.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes,
you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).
Scanning
142
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
• PDF—Use to create a single file with multiple pages.
• Secure PDF—Use to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Use to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu, then TIFF
saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document.
• XPS—Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the
time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the scanned documents are in relation to the original document.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
•
•
•
•
Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Scanning
143
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
• Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the file. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you
scan the document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then shows an
error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
Understanding the printer menus
144
Understanding the printer menus
Menus list
Paper Menu
Reports
Network/Ports
Security
Default Source
Paper Size/Type
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Active NIC
Edit Security Setups
Miscellaneous Security Settings
Configure MP
Network Setup Page
Standard USB
Confidential Print
Substitute Size
Network [x] Setup Page
Erase Temporary Data Files
Paper Texture
Shortcut List
Parallel [x]
Serial [x]
Paper Weight
Fax Job Log
SMTP Setup
Set Date and Time
Paper Loading
Fax Call Log
Custom Types
Copy Shortcuts
Custom Names
Custom Scan Sizes
E-mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
Custom Bin Names
FTP Shortcuts
Universal Setup
Profiles List
Bin Setup
Print Fonts
Standard
Network1
Security Audit Log
Print Directory
Print Demo
Asset Report
Settings
Help
Manage Shortcuts
Option Card Menu2
General Settings
Print All Guides
Fax Shortcuts
Copy Settings
Copy Guide
E-mail Shortcuts
A list of installed DLEs (Download
Emulators) appears.
Fax Settings
E-mail Guide
FTP Shortcuts
E‑mail Settings
Fax Guide
Copy Shortcuts
FTP Settings
FTP Guide
Profile Shortcuts
Flash Drive Menu
Print Defects Guide
Print Settings
Information Guide
1
Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network or Network [x].
2
This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.
Understanding the printer menus
145
Paper menu
Default Source menu
Use
To
Default Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Notes:
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Multipurpose
Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
• If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have
the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray
is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.
Configure MP menu
Use
To
Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
First
Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
• Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the
multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.
• Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual‑feed print jobs.
• First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.
Understanding the printer menus
146
Paper Size/Type menu
Use
To
Tray [x] Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS‑B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.
Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray.
Notes:
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
• If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have
the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. The
multipurpose feeder may also be linked. When one tray is empty, the
print job continues using the linked tray.
• The A6 paper size is supported only in Tray 1 and in the multipurpose
feeder.
Notes:
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is
the factory default setting for all other trays.
• If available, a user‑defined name will appear instead of Custom Type [x].
• Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus
147
Use
To
MP Feeder Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
MP Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for MP Feeder
Size to appear as a menu.
• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size. The
paper size value must be set.
Notes:
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure to “Cassette” for MP Feeder Type
to appear as a menu.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus
148
Use
To
Manual Paper Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.
Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type being manually loaded.
Manual Envelope Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the envelope size being manually loaded.
Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type [x]
Specify the envelope type being manually loaded.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Notes:
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Manual” for Manual Paper
Type to appear as a menu.
Note: 10 Envelope is the U.S. factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
international factory default setting.
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus
149
Use
To
Default ADF Media Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom [x]
Specify the media type being loaded in the ADF.
Note: Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Substitute Size menu
Use
To
Substitute Size
Off
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed
Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available.
Notes:
• All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.
• Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed.
• Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change
Paper appearing.
Paper Texture menu
Use
To
Plain Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded in a specific tray.
Card Stock Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• These options appear only if card stock is supported.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
To
Transparency Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray.
Recycled Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray.
Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific tray.
Vinyl Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the vinyl labels loaded in a specific tray.
Bond Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded in a specific tray.
Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray.
Rough Envelope Texture
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray.
Letterhead Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded in a specific tray.
Preprinted Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded in a specific tray.
Colored Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded in a specific tray.
Light Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the light paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
150
Understanding the printer menus
151
Use
To
Heavy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the heavy paper loaded in a specific tray.
Rough/Cotton Texture
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the rough or cotton paper loaded in a specific tray.
Custom [x] Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Paper Weight menu
Use
To
Plain Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.
Card Stock Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.
Transparency Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.
Recycled Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.
Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.
Vinyl Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the vinyl labels loaded.
Bond Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
152
Use
To
Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.
Rough Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded.
Letterhead Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.
Preprinted Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.
Colored Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.
Light Weight
Light
Specify that the weight of the paper loaded is light.
Heavy Weight
Heavy
Specify that the weight of the paper loaded is heavy.
Rough/Cotton Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the cotton or rough paper loaded.
Custom [x] Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only when the custom type is supported.
Understanding the printer menus
153
Paper Loading menu
Use
To
Card Stock Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Card Stock
as the paper type.
Recycled Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Recycled
as the paper type.
Labels Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Labels as
the paper type.
Vinyl Labels Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Vinyl
Labels as the paper type.
Bond Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Bond as
the paper type.
Letterhead Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Letterhead
as the paper type.
Preprinted Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Preprinted
as the paper type.
Colored Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Colored
as the paper type.
Light Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Light as
the paper type.
Heavy Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Heavy as
the paper type.
Rough/Cotton Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Rough or
Cotton as the paper type.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.
• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Print Properties or the print dialog, depending on your operating system.
Understanding the printer menus
154
Use
To
Custom [x] Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Custom [x]
as the paper type.
Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only when the custom type is
supported.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.
• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Print Properties or the print dialog, depending on your operating system.
Custom Types menu
Use
To
Custom Type [x] Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default custom type name or a user‑defined
custom name created from the Embedded Web Server.
Paper
Card Stock
Notes:
Transparency
• Paper is the factory default setting.
Rough/Cotton
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder to print
Labels
from that source.
Envelope
Recycled
Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus.
Paper
Notes:
Card Stock
• Paper is the factory default setting.
Transparency
Rough/Cotton • The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder to print
from that source.
Labels
Envelope
Custom Names menu
Use
To
Custom Name [x]
Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces Custom Type [x] in
the printer menus.
Understanding the printer menus
155
Custom Scan Sizes menu
Use
To
Custom Scan Size [x]
Scan Size Name
Media Type
Specify a custom scan size name, scan sizes, and options. The custom scan size
name replaces Custom Scan Size [x] in the printer menus.
ADF Media Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Enveloope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Width
1–8.5 inches (25–216 mm)
Height
1–25 inches (25–635.0 mm)
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
2 scans per side
Off
On
Notes:
• ADF Media Type is the factory default setting for custom scan sizes 3, 4,
5, and 6.
• Rough/Cotton is the factory default setting for custom scan sizes 1 and 2.
• 8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Width. 210 millimeters is
the international factory default setting for Width.
• 14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Height. 297 millimeters is
the international factory default setting for Height.
• Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.
• Off is the factory default setting for “2 scans per side.”
Universal Setup menu
Use
To
Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters
Identify the units of measure.
Notes:
• Inches is the US factory default setting.
• Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
156
Use
To
Portrait Width
3–8.5 inches
76–216 mm
Set the portrait width.
Notes:
• If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum width allowed.
• 8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. You can increase the
width in 0.01‑inch increments.
• 216 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase
the width in 1‑mm increments.
Portrait Height
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm
Set the portrait height.
Notes:
• If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum height allowed.
• 14 inches is the US factory default setting. You can increase the
height in 0.01‑inch increments.
• 356 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase
the height in 1‑mm increments.
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge
Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction.
Notes:
• Short Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than the
maximum width supported in the tray.
Reports Menu
Reports menu
Use
To
Menu Settings Page
Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays, installed
memory, total page count, alarm settings, timeouts, printer control panel
language, TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection,
and other information.
Device Statistics
Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and number
of printed pages.
Network Setup Page
Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as
the TCP/IP address information.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected
to print servers.
Network [x] Setup Page
Print a report containing information about the network settings of the printer,
such as the TCP/IP address information.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected
to print servers, and when there is more than one network option installed.
Understanding the printer menus
157
Use
To
Shortcut List
Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts.
Fax Job Log
Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax
Settings menu.
• This menu is supported only in select printer models.
Fax Call Log
Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received, and
blocked calls.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax
Settings menu.
• This menu is supported only in select printer models.
Copy Shortcuts
Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts.
E‑mail Shortcuts
Print a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts.
Fax Shortcuts
Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts.
FTP Shortcuts
Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts.
Profiles List
Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.
Print Fonts
Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in
the printer.
Print Directory
Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or printer
hard disk.
Notes:
• Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
• Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is working and
installed correctly.
Asset Report
Print a report containing asset information including the printer serial number
and model name. The report contains text and UPC bar codes that can be scanned
into an asset database.
Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Use
To
Active NIC
Auto
[list of available network cards]
Allow the printer to connect to a network.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only if an optional network adapter is installed.
Understanding the printer menus
158
Standard Network or Network [x] menu
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu. All inactive ports are omitted.
Use
To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming
data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it,
regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• If PS SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming
data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
NPA Mode
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel, and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Network Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the network input buffer.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The value can be changed in 1KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing. This menu only
appears when a formatted disk is installed.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only when the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel, and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus
159
Use
To
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Standard Network Setup OR
Network [x] Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
Show and set the printer network settings.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless
network.
Reports menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports
Use
To
Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.
Network Card menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Use
To
View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected
View the connection status of the wireless network adapter.
View Card Speed
View the speed of an active wireless network adapter.
Network Address
UAA
LAA
View the network addresses.
Understanding the printer menus
160
Use
To
Job Timeout
Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.
0, 10–225 seconds
Notes:
• “90 seconds” is the factory default setting.
• A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
• If a value between 1 and 9 is selected, then Invalid appears on the
display, and the value is not saved.
Allow the printer to print a banner page.
Banner Page
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
TCP/IP menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.
Use
To
Set Hostname
Set the current TCP/IP host name.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
IP Address
View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that
support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask
View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.
Gateway
View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.
Enable DHCP
On
Off
Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.
Enable RARP
On
Off
Specify the RARP address assignment setting.
Enable BOOTP
On
Off
Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.
Enable AutoIP
Yes
No
Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.
Enable FTP/TFTP
Yes
No
Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File Transfer
Protocol.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
161
Use
To
Enable HTTP Server
Yes
No
Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer
can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.
WINS Server Address
View or change the current WINS server address.
Enable DDNS
Yes
No
View or change the current DDNS setting.
Enable mDNS
Yes
No
View or change the current mDNS setting.
DNS Server Address
View or change the current DNS server address.
Backup DNS Server Address
View or change the backup DNS server addresses.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Backup DNS Server Address 2
Backup DNS Server Address 3
Enable HTTPS
Yes
No
View or change the current HTTPS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
IPv6 menu
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
• Network/Ports menu > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup >IPv6
• Network/Ports menu > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Use
To
Enable IPv6
On
Off
Enable IPv6 in the printer.
Auto Configuration
On
Off
Specify whether or not the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6
address configuration entries provided by a router.
Set Hostname
Set the host name.
View Address
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
162
Wireless menu
Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to a wireless network or printer models that have a wireless
network adapter.
To access the menu, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Use
To
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
Start Push Button Method
Start PIN Method
Establish a wireless network and enable network security.
Notes:
• Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless
network when buttons on both the printer and the access point
(wireless router) are pressed within a given period of time.
• Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network when
a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the
access point.
Enable/Disable WPS Auto‑detection
Enable
Disable
Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with
WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.
Network Mode
Specify the network mode.
BSS Type
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
Notes:
Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
• Infrastructure is the factory default setting. This lets the printer
access a network using an access point.
• Ad hoc configures wireless connection directly between the printer
and a computer.
Compatibility
802.11b/g
802.11b/g/n
Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.
Choose Network
Select an available network for the printer to use.
View Signal Quality
View the quality of the wireless connection.
View Security Mode
View the encryption method for the wireless network.
Note: 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
AppleTalk menu
Note: This menu appears only in printer models that are connected to an Ethernet network or when an optional
wireless network adapter is installed.
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk
Understanding the printer menus
163
Use
To
Activate
Yes
No
Enable or disable AppleTalk support.
View Name
Show the assigned AppleTalk name.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Address
Show the assigned AppleTalk address.
Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
Set Zone
Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.
[list of zones available on the network] Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.
Standard USB menu
Use
To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to
Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.
• The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus
164
Use
To
USB Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the USB input buffer.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard
disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
• The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the
size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the network address information for an external print server.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Parallel [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional parallel card is installed.
Understanding the printer menus
165
Use
To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Parallel Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the parallel input buffer.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any print jobs already buffered on the printer
hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
• The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus
166
Use
To
Advanced Status
On
Off
Enable bidirectional communication through the parallel port.
Protocol
Standard
Fastbytes
Specify the parallel port protocol.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• Off disables parallel port negotiation.
Notes:
• Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most
existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.
• Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Honor Init
On
Off
Determine if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the
computer.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the
parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the
computer is turned on.
Parallel Mode 2
On
Off
Determine if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a
strobe.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the network address information for an external print server.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Serial [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional serial card is installed.
Understanding the printer menus
167
Use
To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then processes it appropriately.
• When set to On, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in NPA
format, it is rejected as bad data.
• When set to Off, the printer does not perform NPA processing.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Serial Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the serial input buffer.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are
printed before normal processing is resumed.
• The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus
168
Use
To
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. The printer does not buffer print jobs on the
printer hard disk.
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Protocol
DTR
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF/DTR
XONXOFF/DTRDSR
Robust XON
On
Off
Select the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port.
Notes:
•
•
•
•
DTR is the factory default setting.
DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.
XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.
XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and
software handshaking settings.
Determine whether the printer communicates availability to the computer.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to
XON/XOFF.
Baud
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
138200
172800
230400
345600
Specify the rate at which data can be received through the serial port.
Data Bits
7
8
Specify the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame.
Notes:
• 9600 is the factory default setting.
• 138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the
Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1,
Serial Option 2, or Serial Option 3 menus.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
169
Use
To
Parity
Even
Odd
None
Ignore
Set the parity for serial input and output data frames.
Honor DSR
On
Off
Determine whether the printer uses the DSR Signal.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables. The serial port uses
DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical
noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray characters to
print. Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing.
SMTP Setup menu
Use
To
Primary SMTP Gateway
Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30
Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to
send an e‑mail.
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Reply Address
Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the
printer.
Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the
SMTP server.
Notes:
• Disabled is the factory default setting.
• When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if
SSL will be used.
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Specify the type of user authentication required for scan‑to e‑mail
privileges.
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
170
Use
To
Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP
server. Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e-mail.
Notes:
User‑Initiated E‑mail*
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID & Password
Use Session E‑mail address & Password
Prompt User
• None is the factory default setting for Device‑Initiated E‑mail and
User‑Initiated E‑mail.
• Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP
server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.
Device Userid
Device Password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain
Security menu
Edit Security Setups menu
Use
To
Edit Backup Password
Use Backup Password
Create a backup password.
• Off
• On
Password
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for “Use Backup Password.”
• This menu item appears only if a backup password exists.
Edit Building Blocks
Internal Accounts
NTLM
Simple Kerberos Setup
Kerberos Setup
Active Directory
LDAP
LDAP+GSSAPI
Password
PIN
Edit settings for Internal Accounts, NTLM, Simple Kerberos Setup, Kerberos Setup,
Active Directory, LDAP, Password, and PIN.
Edit Security Templates
[list of available templates]
Add or edit a security template.
Understanding the printer menus
171
Use
To
Edit Access Controls
Administrative Menus
Function Access
Management
Solutions
Cancel jobs at the Device
Control access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access
points.
Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
Use
To
Login Restrictions
Login failures
Failure time frame
Lockout time
Panel Login Timeout
Remote Login Timeout
Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control
panel before all users are locked out.
Notes:
• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are
locked out. Settings range from 1 to 10 attempts is the factory default setting.
• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1 to 60
minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.
• “Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the
login failures limit. Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes. 5 minutes is the
factory default setting. 1 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.
• “Panel Login Timeout” specifies how long the printer remains idle on the
Home screen before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1
to 900 seconds. 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
• “Remote Login Timeout” specifies how long a remote interface remains idle
before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1 to 120
seconds. 10 minutes is the factory default setting.
Security Reset Jumper
Access controls=”No Security”
No Effect
Reset factory security defaults
Change the value of the security settings.
Notes:
• Access controls=”No Security” retains all the security information that the user
has defined. “No Security" is the factory default setting.
• “No Effect” means the reset has no effect on the device’s security
configuration.
• “Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the user
has defined, and assigns the factory default value to each setting in the
Miscellaneous Security Settings section of both the panel and the Embedded
Web Server.
Understanding the printer menus
172
Use
To
LDAP Certificate Verification
Demand
Try
Allow
Never
Allow the user to request a server certificate.
Notes:
• “Demand” means a server certificate is requested. If a bad certificate is
provided or if no certificate is provided, then the session is terminated
immediately. “Demand” is the factory default setting.
• “Try” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, then
the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then the session
is terminated immediately.
• “Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided,
then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then it will
be ignored, and then the session proceeds normally.
• “Never” means no server certificate is requested.
Minimum PIN Length
1–16
Limit the digit length of the PIN.
Note: 4 is the is the factory default setting.
Confidential Print menu
Use
To
Max Invalid PIN
Off
2–10
Set a limit on the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
• When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores confidential print jobs.
Off
Notes:
1 hour
• If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print jobs
4 hours
reside in the printer memory or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those
24 hours
print jobs does not change to the new default value.
1 week
• If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in the printer memory are
deleted.
Repeat Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
173
Use
To
Verify Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.
Reserve Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Erase Temporary Data Files menu
Erase Temporary Data Files deletes only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file
system. All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Use
To
Wiping Mode
Auto
Specify the mode for erasing temporary data files.
Automatic Method
Single pass
Multiple pass
Mark all disk space used by a previous print job. This method does not permit the file
system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.
Notes:
• “Single pass” is the factory default setting.
• Only automatic wiping enables users to erase temporary data files without
having to turn off the printer for an extended amount of time.
• Highly confidential information should be erased using only the Multiple pass
method.
Security Audit Log menu
Use
To
Export Log
Let an authorized user export the audit log.
Notes:
• To export the audit log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be
attached to the printer.
• The audit log can be downloaded from the Embedded Web Server and saved
on a computer.
Understanding the printer menus
174
Use
To
Delete Log
Yes
No
Specify whether or not audit logs are deleted.
Configure Log
Enable Audit
Yes
No
Enable Remote Syslog
No
Yes
Remote Syslog Facility
0–23
Severity of events to log
0–7
Specify how and whether or not audit logs are created.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and
remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.
• Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No is the
factory default setting.
• Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote
syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.
• If the security audit log is activated, then the severity value of each event is
recorded. 4 is the factory default setting.
Set Date/Time menu
Use
To
Current Date and Time
View the current date and time settings for the printer.
Manually Set Date and Time
Enter the date and time.
Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.
Time Zone
Select the time zone.
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Automatically Observe DST
On
Off
Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end times
associated with the printer Time Zone setting.
Custom Time Zone Setup
DST Start Week
DST Start Day
DST Start Month
DST Start Time
DST End Week
DST End Day
DST End Month
DST End Time
DST Offset
Enable the user to set up the time zone.
Enable NTP
On
Off
Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
network.
NTP Server
View the NTP server address.
Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time
associated with the Time Zone setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
175
Use
To
Enable Authentication
On
Off
Change the authentication setting to On or Off.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Settings menu
General Settings menu
Use
To
Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Greek
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Set the language of the text appearing on the printer display.
Eco-Mode
Off
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.
Note: Not all languages are available for all printers, and you may
need to install special hardware for those languages to appear.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. This setting resets the
printer to its factory default settings.
• Energy minimizes the power used by the printer.
Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.
• Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and paper
specialty media.
• Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media
needed for a print job. Performance may be affected, but
print quality is not.
Understanding the printer menus
176
Use
To
ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Disabled
Specify whether the ADF sounds a beep when paper is loaded.
ADF Multi‑feed Sensor
On
Off
Detect when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at once.
Quiet Mode
Off
On
Reduce the amount of noise produced by the printer.
Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. This setting supports the
performance specifications for your printer.
• On configures the printer to produce as little noise as
possible. This setting is best suited for printing text and line
art.
• For optimal printing of color‑rich documents, set Quiet Mode
to Off.
• Selecting Photo from the print driver may disable Quiet
Mode and provide better print quality and full speed
printing.
Run Initial setup
Yes
No
Set the printer to run the setup wizard.
Note: Yes is the default setting. After completing the setup
wizard, the default becomes No.
Understanding the printer menus
177
Use
To
Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Custom Key [x]
Specify a language and custom key information for the printer
keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and
symbols from the keyboard.
Paper Sizes
US
Metric
Specify the default paper measurement.
Notes:
• US is the factory default setting.
• The initial setting is determined by your country or region
selection in the initial setup wizard.
• Changing this setting also changes the default setting for
each input source in the Paper Size/Type menu.
Scan to PC Port Range
[port range]
Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking
firewall.
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
178
Use
To
Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Custom Text [x]
Specify what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the
home screen.
For the Left side and Right side menus, select from the following
options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text [x]
Model Name
Notes:
• IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
• Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
Displayed Information (continued)
Black Toner
Customize the displayed information for Black Toner.
Select from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
• Do not display is the factory default setting for When to
display.
• Default is the factory default setting for Message to display.
Understanding the printer menus
179
Use
To
Displayed Information (continued)
Waste Toner Bottle
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors
Customize the displayed information for Waste Toner Bottle, Paper
Jam, Load Paper, and Service Errors.
Select from the following options:
Display
Yes
No
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
• No is the factory default setting for Display.
• Default is the factory default setting for Message to display.
Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Copy Shortcuts
Fax
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles and Solutions
Bookmarks
Jobs by user
Forms and Favorites
Change the icons that appear on the home screen.
Date Format
MM‑DD‑YYYY
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD
Format the printer date.
Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock
Format the printer time.
Screen Brightness
20–100
Specify the brightness of the control panel screen.
For each icon, select from the following options:
Display
Do Not display
Notes:
• Display is the factory default setting for Copy, Fax, E‑mail,
FTP, Search Held Jobs, Held jobs, USB Drive, and Forms and
Favorites.
• Do not display is the factory default setting for Change
Language, Copy Shortcuts, Fax Shortcuts, Email Shortcuts,
FTP Shortcuts, Profiles and Solutions, Bookmarks, and Jobs
by user.
Notes:
• MM‑DD‑YYYY is the U.S. factory default setting.
• DD-MM-YYYY is the international factory default setting.
Note: 12 hour A.M./P.M. is the factory default setting.
Note: 100 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
180
Use
To
One Page Copy
Off
On
Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.
Output Lighting
Normal/Standby Mode
Off
Dim
Bright
Set the amount of light from the standard bin.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Dim is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is set to Energy
or Energy/Paper.
• Bright is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is Off or set
to Paper.
Error Lighting
On
Off
Determine if indicator lights blink when the printer encounters
errors.
Audio Feedback
Button Feedback
On
Off
Set the audio volume for the buttons.
Volume
1–10
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
• 5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
Tactile Touchscreen Feedback
On
Off
Provide touch‑screen sensation feedback.
Show Bookmarks
Yes
No
Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area.
Allow Background Removal
On
Off
Specify whether image background removal is allowed in copy, fax,
e‑mail, FTP, or scan‑to‑USB jobs.
Allow Custom Job Scans
On
Off
Scan multiple jobs to one file.
Scanner Jam Recovery
Job level
Page level
Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs
in the ADF.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting. The background of the
image is removed.
Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, then the
Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs.
Notes:
• Job level is the factory default setting. If selected, then the
entire job must be rescanned if any pages jam.
• If Page level is selected, then rescan from the jammed page
forward.
Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300
Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server
refreshes.
Note: 120 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
181
Use
To
Contact Name
Specify a contact name for the printer.
Note: The contact name is stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Location
Specify the location of the printer.
Note: The location is stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Set an alarm to sound when the printer requires user intervention.
For each alarm type, select from the following options:
Off
Single
Continuous
Notes:
• Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. This
sounds three quick beeps.
• Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm. This
means that no alarm will sound.
• Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
1–240
Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer
enters a lower power state.
Timeouts
Sleep Mode
Disabled
1–120
Set the amount of time in minutes the printer waits after a job is
printed before it goes into a reduced power state.
Note: 15 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• 20 is the factory default setting.
• Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require
longer warm‑up times.
• Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an electrical
circuit with room lighting or you notice lights flickering in the
room.
• Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under
most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print
with minimum warm‑up time.
Understanding the printer menus
182
Use
To
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout
Disabled
1 hour
2 hours
3 hours
6 hours
1 day
2 days
3 days
1 week
2 weeks
1 month
Set the amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout on Connection
Hibernate
Do Not Hibernate
Set the printer to Hibernate Timeout even when there is an active
Ethernet connection.
Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before
returning to Ready state.
Timeouts
Prolong Screen Timeout
On
Off
Set the printer to continue a specified job without returning to the
home screen when the screen timeout timer expires.
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an
end‑of‑job message before canceling the rest of the print job.
Note: 3 days is the factory default setting.
Note: Hibernate is the factory default setting.
Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• 90 is the factory default setting.
• When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the
printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any
new print jobs are waiting.
• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation.
This has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for more data
before canceling a print job.
Notes:
• 40 is the factory default setting.
• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation. This has no effect on PCL emulation
print jobs.
Understanding the printer menus
183
Use
To
Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
5–255
Set the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention
before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and
continues to print other jobs in the print queue.
Notes:
• 30 is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working
printer hard disk is installed.
Error Recovery
Auto Reboot
Reboot when idle
Reboot always
Reboot never
Set the printer to restart when an error is encountered.
Error Recovery
Max Auto Reboots
1–20
Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can
perform.
Print Recovery
Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline
situations when not resolved within the specified time period.
Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
On
Off
Auto
Note: Reboot always is the factory default setting.
Note: 2 is the factory default setting.
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the
pages is needed for other printer tasks.
• On sets the printer to reprint jammed pages.
• Off sets the printer not to reprint jammed pages.
Print Recovery
Jam Assist
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically check for jammed paper.
Print Recovery
Page Protect
Off
On
Let the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed
otherwise.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. This prints a partial page
when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.
• On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the
entire page prints.
Understanding the printer menus
184
Use
To
Press Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer responds when pressing the Sleep
button while the printer is idle.
Notes:
• Sleep is the factory default setting.
• Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower
power configuration.
• If the printer is in Sleep mode, then the display appears off
and the Sleep button turns amber in color. Touch anywhere
on the display or press a button on the control panel to wake
the printer from Sleep mode.
• If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the display is
completely off and the Sleep button turns amber and is
blinking.
Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer responds when pressing the Sleep
button for 3 seconds or longer while the printer is idle.
Notes:
• Do Nothing is the factory default setting.
• Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower
power configuration.
• If the printer is in Sleep mode, then the display appears off
and the Sleep button turns amber. Touch anywhere on the
display or press a button on the control panel to wake the
printer from Sleep mode.
Restore the printer settings to the factory default settings.
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
Notes:
• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. This keeps the
user‑defined settings.
• Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory
default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored
in flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not affected.
Copy Settings menu
Use
To
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
185
Use
To
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided
Specify whether an original document is two‑sided (duplex) or one‑sided, and then to
specify whether the copy should be two‑sided or one‑sided.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• 1 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on one side and the copy
will also have print on one side.
• 1 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on one side, while the
copy will have print on both sides.
• 2 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on both sides, while the
copy will have print on just one side.
• 2 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on both sides, and the
copy will also have print on both sides.
Paper Saver
Off
2‑up Portrait
2‑up Landscape
4‑up Portrait
4‑up Landscape
Allow copying two or four sheets of a document on one page.
Print Page Borders
On
Off
Specify whether or not a border is printed.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: “(1,2,3) (1,2,3)” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
186
Use
To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Difficult Media Letter
Difficult Media A5
Difficult Media Legal
Difficult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
ID Card
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Copy To Source
Tray [x]
Auto Size Match
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for copy jobs.
Transparency Separators
On
Off
Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Darkness
1–9
Specify the level of darkness for the copy job.
Number of Copies
1–999
Specify the number of copies for the copy job.
Notes:
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
• A4 is the international factory default setting.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
187
Use
To
Header/Footer
[Location]
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Custom text
Specify the header or footer information and its location on the page.
For the location, select from the following options:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Top left
Top middle
Top right
Bottom left
Bottom middle
Bottom right
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for the location.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for “Print on.”
Overlay
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
Off
Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.
Custom Overlay
Specify the custom overlay text.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: A maximum of 64 characters is allowed.
Allow priority copies
On
Off
Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document.
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Copy, in a single copy job, a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Auto Center
Off
On
Automatically center the content on the page.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
188
Use
To
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for each
color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast used for the copy job.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Allow edge-to-edge scanning of the original document.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.
Sample Copy
Off
On
Create a sample copy of the original document.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Fax Settings menu
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.
Use
To
Fax Name
Specify the name of the fax in the printer.
Fax Number
Specify the telephone number assigned to the fax.
Understanding the printer menus
189
Use
To
Fax ID
Fax Name
Fax Number
Specify how the fax is identified.
Enable Manual Fax
On
Off
Set the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax
number.
• Touch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
Memory Use
All receive
Mostly receive
Equal
Mostly send
All send
Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs.
Notes:
• “Equal” is the factory default setting. This splits the memory for sending and
receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.
•
•
•
•
“Mostly send” specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.
“All send” specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.
“All receive” specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
“Mostly receive” specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
Cancel Faxes
Allow
Don't Allow
Specify whether or not the printer cancels fax jobs.
Caller ID
Off
Primary
Alternate
Specify the type of caller ID being used.
Fax number masking
Off
From left
From right
Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.
Note: Allow is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to Mask”
setting.
Digits to Mask
0–58
Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
190
Use
To
Fax Cover Page
Fax Cover Page
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Include to Field
On
Off
Include from Field
On
Off
From
Include Message Field
On
Off
Message
Include Logo
On
Off
Include Footer [x]
On
Off
Footer [x]
Configure the fax cover page.
Use
To
Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality, but
increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Notes:
• “Off by default” is the factory default setting for Fax Cover Page.
• Off is the factory default setting for all other menu items.
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
191
Use
To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specify how the text and graphics are oriented on a page.
Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• “Long edge” assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
• “Short edge” assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Dial Prefix
Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.
Note: Text is the factory default setting.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
192
Use
To
Dialing Prefix Rules
Prefix Rule [x]
Establish a dialing prefix rule.
Automatic Redial
0–9
Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number.
Redial frequency
1–200
Specify the number of minutes between redials.
Behind a PABX
Yes
No
Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.
Enable ECM
Yes
No
Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.
Enable Fax Scans
On
Off
Fax files that are scanned at the printer.
Driver to fax
Yes
No
Allow the printer driver to send fax jobs.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.
Dial Mode
Tone
Pulse
Specify the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse.
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Tone is the factory default setting.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Understanding the printer menus
193
Use
To
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for each
color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast in the scanned image.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge prior to faxing.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the sharpness of a fax.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer output than the
default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
194
Use
To
Enable Color Fax Scans
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Enable color faxing.
Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting.
Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono Convert all outgoing faxes to black and white.
Faxes
Note: On is the factory default setting.
On
Off
Use
To
Enable Fax Receive
On
Off
Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.
Fax Job Waiting
None
Toner
Toner and Supplies
Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable
resources.
Rings to Answer
1–25
Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.
Auto Answer
Yes
No
Allow the printer to answer an incoming fax job.
Manual Answer Code
0–9
Enter a code on the telephone number pad to begin receiving a fax.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• 9 is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is used when the printer shares a line with a telephone.
Auto Reduction
On
Off
Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated
fax source.
Paper Source
Auto
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
On
Enable two‑sided (duplex) printing for incoming fax jobs.
Separator Sheets
Off
Before Job
After Job
Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
195
Use
To
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify a bin for received faxes.
Fax Footer
On
Off
Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax.
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.
Fax Forwarding
Print
Print and Forward
Forward
Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.
Forward to
Fax
E‑mail
FTP
LDSS
eSF
Specify the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded.
Forward to Shortcut
Enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP, LDSS,
or eSF).
Block No Name Fax
Off
On
Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no fax ID specified.
Banned Fax List
Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer.
Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
Off
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule
Enable fax holding all of the time or according to set schedule.
Enable Color Fax Receive
On
Off
Enable the printer to receive fax in color and print it in grayscale.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Fax is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
196
Use
To
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.
Receive Error Log
Print Never
Print on Error
Enable printing of a receive error log following a receive error.
Auto Print Logs
On
Off
Enable automatic printing of fax logs.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.
Logs Display
Remote Station Name
Dialed Number
Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or fax name returned.
Enable Job Log
On
Off
Enable access to the Fax Job log.
Enable Call Log
On
Off
Enable access to the Fax Call log.
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify the bin where fax logs are printed.
Use
To
Speaker Mode
Always Off
On until Connected
Always On
Specify the mode of the speaker.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
• Bin [x] appears only when at least one optional bin is installed.
Notes:
• “On until Connected” is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the
fax connection is made.
• Always On turns the speaker on.
• Always Off turns the speaker off.
Speaker Volume
High
Low
Control the volume setting.
Note: High is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
197
Use
To
Ringer Volume
Off
On
Control the fax speaker ringer volume.
Use
To
All Rings
Single Ring Only
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.
Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Settings menu
Use
To
E‑mail Server Setup
Subject
Message
File Name
Specify e‑mail server information.
E‑mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
Off by default
Always On
Send a copy of the e-mail to the sender.
E‑mail Server Setup
Max E‑mail size
0–65535 KB
Specify the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes (KB).
E‑mail Server Setup
Size Error Message
Send a message when an e-mail is bigger than the configured size limit.
E‑mail Server Setup
Limit destinations
Specify a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limits e‑mail
destinations only to that domain name.
Notes:
• The subject field has a limitation of 255 characters.
• The message field has a limitation of 512 characters.
Note: “Never appears” is the factory default setting.
Note: E-mails bigger than the specified maximum size are not sent.
Notes:
• E-mail can be sent only to the specified domain.
• The limit is one domain.
Understanding the printer menus
198
Use
To
E‑mail Server Setup
Web Link Setup
Server
Login
Password
Path
File Name
Web Link
Define the e‑mail server path name; for example: /directory/path.
Note: The characters * : ? < > | are invalid entries for a path name.
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specify the format of the scanned file.
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
Set the version of the PDF file that will be scanned for e‑mailing.
Content Type
Graphics
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Color
Off
On
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color or in black and
white.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
199
Use
To
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Difficult Media Letter
Difficult Media A5
Difficult Media Legal
Difficult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the paper size of the document being scanned.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long Edge
Short Edge
Specify how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• A4 is the international factory default setting.
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Notes:
•
•
•
•
“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
200
Use
To
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
E‑mail images sent as
Attachment
Web Link
Specify how the images are sent.
Use Multi‑Page Tiff
On
Off
Choose between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a multiplepage scan‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or
multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specify whether or not the transmission log prints.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify the bin for FTP logs.
E‑mail Bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off.
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
• Bin [x] appears only when at least one optional bin is installed.
Note: “8 bit” is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specify whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Understanding the printer menus
201
Use
To
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the Save As Shortcut button does not appear on the e-mail
Destination screen.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for
each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
202
Use
To
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.
Use cc:/bcc:
Off
On
Enable the use of the “cc:” and “bcc:” fields.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
FTP Settings menu
Use
To
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specify the format of the file for FTP sending.
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
Set the version level of the PDF file for FTP sending.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Color
Off
On
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color or in black and
white.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
203
Use
To
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the page orientation of the scanned image.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Difficult Media Letter
Difficult Media A5
Difficult Media Legal
Difficult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long Edge
Short Edge
Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
• A4 is the international factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape ).
• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape ).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.
Notes:
•
•
•
•
“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Understanding the printer menus
204
Use
To
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specify whether the transmission log prints.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify the bin for FTP logs.
FTP bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off.
File Name
Enter a base file name.
Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
• Bin [x] only appears when at least one optional bin is installed.
Note: “8 bit” is the factory default setting.
Note: The limitation is 53 characters.
Custom Job Scanning
On
Off
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Understanding the printer menus
205
Use
To
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for
each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness of a scanned image.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
206
Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
Use
To
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specify the format of the file to be sent through FTP.
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A‑1a
Set the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
207
Use
To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Difficult Media Letter
Difficult Media A5
Difficult Media Legal
Difficult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long Edge
Short Edge
Specify how the text and graphics are oriented on a page.
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• “Long Edge” assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
• “Short Edge” assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Notes:
•
•
•
•
“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
Text or Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
208
Use
To
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
File Name
Type a base file name.
Note: You can enter up to 53 characters.
Custom Job Scanning
On
Off
Copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job.
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for each
color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the scanned image.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
209
Use
To
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Print Settings
Use
To
Copies
1–999
Specify a default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Tray [x]
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to page orientation.
Note: “(1,2,3) (1,2,3)” is the factory default setting.
Note: “1 sided” is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Long Edge sets binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge
for landscape). This is the factory default setting.
• Short Edge sets binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left
edge for landscape).
Paper Saver Orientation Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Auto
Notes:
Landscape
• Auto is the factory default setting.
Portrait
• This setting affects jobs if the value of the Paper Saver setting in the same menu is not set
to Off.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
To
Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Specify that multiple pages are printed on one side of a sheet.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border on each page image.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Print multiple-page images on one side of a paper.
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether to insert blank separator sheets.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of pages that will print per side.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of pages and whether they are in portrait or
landscape orientation.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to
“(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a blank page is inserted between
each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is
useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document .
Separator Sheet Source Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Tray [x]
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Multipurpose Feeder
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
210
Specify whether to insert blank pages in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
211
Print Settings
Setup menu
Use
To
Printer Language
PCL Emulation
PS Emulation
Set the default printer language.
Notes:
• PS Emulation is the factory default printer language.
• Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a
software program from sending print jobs that use another
printer language.
Job Waiting
On
Off
Specify that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they
require unavailable printer options or custom settings. They are
stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print normally. When
the missing information or options are obtained, the stored jobs
print.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if
the printer loses power.
Print Area
Normal
Fit to Page
Whole Page
Set the logical and physical printable area.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to
print data in the non‑printable area defined by the Normal
setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.
• Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the
non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting. Whole
Page only affects pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter.
This has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or
PostScript interpreter.
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Disk
Set the storage location for downloads.
Notes:
• RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in the
RAM is temporary.
• Storing downloads in the flash memory or in a printer hard
disk places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in
the flash memory or in the printer hard disk even when the
printer is turned off.
• This menu appears only when a formatted, working flash
drive or printer hard disk is installed.
Understanding the printer menus
212
Use
To
Resource Save
On
Off
Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as
fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer receives a
job that requires more memory than is available.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. This sets the printer to
retain the downloads only until memory is needed.
Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.
• On retains the downloads during language changes and
printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory, then
Memory Full [38] appears, and downloads are not
deleted.
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First
Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed
when Print All is selected.
Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting. Print jobs always
appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel.
Finishing menu
Use
To
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specify whether two‑sided (duplex) printing is set as the default for all print jobs.
Notes:
• “1 sided” is the factory default setting.
• You can set two‑sided printing from the printer software.
For Windows users:
Click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
For Macintosh users:
Choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and pop‑up
menus.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to page orientation.
Notes:
• Long Edge is the factory default setting. This assumes binding along the long
edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies
1–999
Specify the default number of copies for each print job.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Note: “(1,2,3) (1,2,3)” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
213
Use
To
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a
blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all
page 1's and after all page 2's.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in
a document.
Separator Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the order in which pages are printed on a single sheet when using Paper Saver.
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation in which pages are printed on a single sheet.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border when using Paper Saver.
Note: Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• When the number of pages per sheet is selected, each page is scaled so that
the number of pages you want can be displayed on the sheet.
Notes:
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in
portrait or in landscape orientation.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and
landscape.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
214
Quality menu
Use
To
Print Resolution
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
1200 Image Q
2400 Image Q
Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch.
Pixel Boost
Off
Fonts
Horizontally
Vertically
Both directions
Isolated
Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity, in order to enhance images horizontally
or vertically, or to enhance fonts.
Toner Darkness
1–10
Lighten or darken the printed output.
Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• 8 is the factory default setting.
• Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Enhance Fine Lines
On
Off
Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical
circuit diagrams, and flow charts.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• You can set this option from the printer software. For Windows users, click File >
Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For Macintosh
users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and
pop‑up menus.
• To set this option using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer IP
address in the Web browser address field.
Gray Correction
Auto
Off
Automatically adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images.
Brightness
‑6 to 6
Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it. You can conserve toner
by lightening the output.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast
0–5
Adjust the contrast of printed objects.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting menu
Note: This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed. Make sure the printer
hard disk is not read/write‑ or write‑protected.
Understanding the printer menus
215
Use
To
Job Accounting Log
Off
On
Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.
Job Accounting Utilities
Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.
Accounting Log Frequency
Weekly
Monthly
Determine and set how often a log file is created.
Log Action at End of Frequency
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.
Disk Near Full Level
Off
1–99
Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near
Full Action.
Disk Near Full Action
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determine and set how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full.
Disk Full Action
None
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum
limit (100MB).
URL to Post Logs
Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs.
E‑mail Address to Send Logs
Specify the e‑mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting.
• The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is
triggered.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
216
Use
To
Log File Prefix
Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.
Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log
file prefix.
Utilities menu
Use
To
Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Not Restored
All
Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.
Notes:
• Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not
affected.
• Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the
printer hard disk or memory.
Format Flash
Yes
No
Format the flash memory.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is
being formatted.
Notes:
• Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
• No cancels the format request.
• Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in
the printer.
• The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
• This menu item appears only when a non‑defective flash memory card is
installed.
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Do Not Delete
Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs,
and parked jobs.
Notes:
• Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to
return to the originating screen after the deletion.
• Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu for
touch‑screen printer models. When selected in non‑touch‑screen printer
models, Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after
the deletion.
Activate Hex Trace
Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.
Notes:
• When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.
• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn off or reset the printer.
Understanding the printer menus
217
Use
To
Coverage Estimator
Off
On
Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is
printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
XPS menu
Use
To
Print Error Pages
Off
On
Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PDF menu
Use
To
Scale to Fit
Yes
No
Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.
Annotations
Do Not Print
Print
Print annotations in a PDF.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
PostScript menu
Use
To
Print PS Error
On
Off
Print a page containing the PostScript error.
Lock PS Startup Mode
On
Off
Disable the SysStart file.
Font Priority
Resident
Flash/Disk
Establish the font search order.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Resident is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is available only when a formatted flash memory option
card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.
• Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
• Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.
Understanding the printer menus
218
PCL Emul menu
Use
To
Font Source
Resident
Disk
Download
Flash
All
Specify the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu.
Notes:
• “Resident” is the factory default setting. Resident shows the factory
default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM.
• “Flash” and “Disk” settings show all fonts resident in that option.
• The flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be read/write‑,
write‑, or password‑protected.
• “Download” shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.
• “All” shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
Courier 10
Identify a specific font and the option where it is stored.
Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
12U PC‑850
Specify the symbol set for each font name.
Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting. Courier 10 shows the font
name, font ID, and the storage location in the printer. The font source
abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for Download.
Notes:
• 10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the international
factory default setting.
• A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation,
and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or
specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the
supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
1.00–1008.00
Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.
Notes:
• 12 is the factory default setting.
• Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 0.014 inch.
• Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25‑point increments.
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100
PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Notes:
•
•
•
•
10 is the factory default setting.
Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi).
Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but it
cannot be changed.
Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.
Notes:
• Portrait is the factory default setting. Portrait prints text and graphics
parallel to the short edge of the page.
• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
Understanding the printer menus
219
Use
To
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
Specify the number of lines that print on each page.
Notes:
• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the Paper Size
and Orientation you want before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm
Set the printer to print on A4‑size paper.
Notes:
• “198 mm” is the factory default setting.
• The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow printing of eighty
10‑pitch characters.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
On
Off
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after
a line feed (LF) control command.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
On
Off
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command.
Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
Off
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Env
Off
None
0–199
Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
different source assignments for trays and feeders.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• “Off” is the factory default setting.
• “None” ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This option appears only
when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter.
• “0–199” allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Understanding the printer menus
220
Use
To
Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
T1 Default = 4
T1 Default = 5
T1 Default = 20
T1 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3
Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray or feeder.
Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
Restore all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.
HTML menu
Use
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers
To
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Taffy
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
New SansMTJA
NewSansMTKO
Set the default font for HTML documents.
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not
specify a font.
Understanding the printer menus
221
Use
To
Font Size
1–255 pt
Set the default font size for HTML documents.
Notes:
• 12 pt is the factory default setting.
• Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale
1–400%
Scale the default font for HTML documents.
Notes:
• 100% is the factory default setting.
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Set the page orientation for HTML documents.
Margin Size
8–255 mm
Set the page margin for HTML documents.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• 19 mm is the factory default setting.
• Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Image menu
Use
To
Auto Fit
On
Off
Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.
Invert
On
Off
Invert bitonal monochrome images.
Scaling
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.
Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings
for some images.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Notes:
• Best Fit is the factory default setting.
• When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Understanding the printer menus
222
Use
To
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape
Set the image orientation.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Help menu
The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer (MFP) as PDF files. They
contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks, including copying, scanning, and faxing.
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer.
Menu item
Description
Print All Guides
Prints all the guides
Copy Guide
Provides information about making copies and changing settings
E‑mail Guide
Provides information about sending e‑mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or
the address book, and about changing settings
Fax Guide
Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers,
or the address book, and about changing settings
FTP Guide
Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an
FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings
Print Defects Guide
Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints
Information Guide
Provides help in locating additional information
Saving money and the environment
223
Saving money and the environment
Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly
reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both
sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
For more information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see “Using Eco‑Mode”
on page 224.
Using recycled paper
Use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser/LED printers is supported. For more information on
recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled paper and other office papers” on page 80.
Conserving supplies
Use both sides of the paper
If your printer model supports two‑sided printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of
the paper.
Notes:
• Two-sided printing is the default setting in the print driver.
• For a complete list of supported products and countries, go to www.dell.com/support.
Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by
setting multiple page printing (N‑Up) for the print job.
Check your first draft for accuracy
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:
• Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before you print it.
• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Avoid paper jams
Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 248.
Saving money and the environment
224
Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode > select a setting
Use
To
Off
Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode. Off supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
Energy
Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
• Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the
first page is printed.
• The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper
• Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) feature.
• Turn off print log features.
3 Click Submit.
Reducing printer noise
Enable Quiet Mode to reduce printer noise.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting
Saving money and the environment
225
Use
To
On
Reduce printer noise.
Notes:
• Print jobs are processed at a reduced speed.
• Printer engine motors do not start until a document
is ready to print. There will be a short delay before
the first page is printed.
Off
Use factory default settings.
Note: This setting supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
3 Click Submit.
Adjusting Sleep mode
To save energy, decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Sleep mode.
Select from 1 to 120 minutes. The factory default setting is 30 minutes.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.
3 In the Sleep Mode field, enter the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode
2 In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode,
and then touch Submit.
Saving money and the environment
226
Using Hibernate mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low‑power operating mode.
Notes:
• Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
• Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job. A hard reset or a long press of
the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode.
• If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the Embedded Web Server is disabled.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings
2 From the “Press Sleep Button” or “Press and Hold Sleep Button” menu, select Hibernate, and then touch Submit.
Adjusting the brightness of the printer display
To save energy, or if you are have trouble reading from the display, adjust the brightness of the display.
Select from 20 to 100. The factory default setting is 100.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings.
3 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Screen Brightness
2 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display, and then touch Submit.
Saving money and the environment
Recycling
Recycling Dell products
To return Dell products for recycling:
1 Visit our Web site at www.dell.com/recycle.
2 Select your country or region.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
227
Securing the printer
228
Securing the printer
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Type of memory
Description
Volatile memory
Your printer uses standard random access memory (RAM) to
temporarily buffer user data during simple print jobs.
Non-volatile memory
Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to
store the operating system, device settings, network
information, bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.
Hard disk memory
Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer
hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality. This lets
the device retain buffered user data from complex print jobs,
as well as form data, and font data.
Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
•
•
•
•
•
•
The printer is being decommissioned.
The printer hard disk is being replaced.
The printer is being moved to a different department or location.
The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
The printer is being sold to another organization.
Disposing of a printer hard disk
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.
• Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
• Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
• Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to
physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered
data, simply turn off the printer.
Securing the printer
229
Erasing non‑volatile memory
Erase individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions by following these
steps:
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display, instead of the standard home screen icons.
3 Touch Wipe All Settings.
The printer restarts several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, and passwords from the printer
memory.
4 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Erasing printer hard disk memory
Notes:
• Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
• Configuring Erase Temporary Data Files in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left
by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.
Using the printer control panel
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, the touch screen displays a list of functions.
3 Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
• Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
• Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a
verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely erasing data
from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.
4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
• Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable
for other user tasks.
5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
Securing the printer
230
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard disk is
installed.
3 From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:
• Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3 Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
• Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer
will return to the Enable/Disable screen.
5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
Securing the printer
231
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, you may need to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the
printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, check the “Embedded Web Server —
Security” Administrator’s Guide from your printer CD or from our Web site, or contact the place where you purchased
the printer.
Maintaining the printer
232
Maintaining the printer
Warning—Potential Damage: Failure to maintain optimum printer performance, or to replace parts and supplies,
may cause damage to your printer.
Cleaning printer parts
Cleaning the printer
Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer
warranty.
1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.
2 Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
3 Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water, and use it to wipe the outside of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents to prevent damage to the exterior
of the printer.
5 Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job.
Maintaining the printer
Cleaning the scanner glass
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.
1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2 Open the scanner cover.
3 Remove the white underside of the scanner cover.
233
Maintaining the printer
234
4 Open the bottom ADF door.
2
1
5 Wipe the ADF scanner glass under the ADF door.
6 Close the bottom ADF door.
7 Place the white underside of the scanner cover on the scanner glass, and then close the scanner cover.
Maintaining the printer
235
8 Wipe the areas shown, and then let them dry.
1
White underside of the scanner cover
2
Scanner glass
3
ADF glass
4
White underside of the ADF cover
9 Close the scanner cover.
Checking the status of parts and supplies
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Device Status > More Details.
Estimated number of remaining pages
The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer. Its accuracy may
vary significantly and is dependent on many factors, such as actual document content, print quality settings, and
other printer settings.
Maintaining the printer
236
The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption is
different from the historical printing consumption. Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing or replacing
supplies based on the estimate. Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer, the estimated cartridge yield is
based on approximately 5% coverage per page.
Ordering parts and supplies
Ordering supplies using the Supplies Ordering Utility
1 Use the Search command on the Start menu to locate Status Monitor Center.
2 Open the application, and then click Order Supplies.
Ordering supplies using Printer Home
1 Use the Search command on the Start menu to locate Dell Printer Home.
2 Open the application, and then click Maintenance > Order supplies.
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you
are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Direct sunlight
Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
High humidity above 80%
Salty air
Corrosive gases
Heavy dust
Maintaining the printer
237
Replacing supplies
Replacing the toner cartridge
1 Lift the front cover, and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
1
2
2 Pull the cartridge out of the printer using the handle.
Maintaining the printer
238
3 Unpack the new toner cartridge, then remove the packing material, and then shake the cartridge to redistribute
the toner.
4 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails
inside the printer.
Note: Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in.
Warning—Potential Damage: When replacing a toner cartridge, do not leave the imaging unit exposed to direct
light for an extended period of time. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Maintaining the printer
239
5 Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.
2
1
Maintaining the printer
240
Replacing the imaging unit
1 Lift the front cover, and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
1
2
2 Pull out the toner cartridge from the printer using the handle.
Maintaining the printer
241
3 Lift the blue handle, and then pull out the imaging unit from the printer.
4 Unpack the new imaging unit, and then shake it.
5 Remove all packing material from the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of
future print jobs.
Maintaining the printer
242
6 Insert the imaging unit into the printer by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the imaging unit with the arrows
on the side rails inside the printer.
7 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails
inside the printer.
Maintaining the printer
243
8 Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.
2
1
Moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
Before moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
Maintaining the printer
244
• If an optional tray is installed, then remove it from the printer. To remove the optional tray, slide the latch on the
right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.
• Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
• Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
• Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer
warranty.
Moving the printer to another location
The printer and its hardware options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:
• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
• Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the hardware
options.
• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.
Managing the printer
245
Managing the printer
Managing printer messages
Use the Status Messenger application to view error messages requiring your intervention on your printer. When there
is an error, a bubble appears telling you what the error is, and points you to the appropriate recovery information.
If you installed Status Messenger with your printer software, then the application launches automatically when the
software installation is completed. The installation is successful if you see the Status Messenger icon in the system tray.
Notes:
• This feature is available only in Windows XP or later.
• Make sure bidirectional communication support is in place so the printer and the computer can communicate.
Disabling Status Messenger
1 From the system tray, right‑click the Status Messenger icon.
2 Select Exit.
Enabling Status Messenger
1 Use the Search command on the Start menu to locate Status Messenger.
2 Open the application.
Accessing Status Monitor Center
Use this application to view the status of any USB‑ or network‑connected printer and to order supplies online.
Note: Make sure bidirectional communication support is in place so the printer and the computer can communicate.
1 Use the Search command on the Start menu to locate Status Monitor Center.
2 Open the application.
Checking the virtual display
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.
Managing the printer
246
Setting up e‑mail alerts
Configure the printer to send you e‑mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed
or added, or when there is a paper jam.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings.
3 From the Other Settings menu, click E‑mail Alert Setup.
4 Select the items you want to be notified on, and then type the e‑mail addresses.
5 Click Submit.
Note: For information on setting up the e‑mail server, contact your system support person.
Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the
printer, network, and supplies.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web
Server
You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their
end‑of‑life by setting the selectable alerts.
Notes:
• Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge, imaging unit, and maintenance kit.
• All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all selectable alerts can
be set for the end‑of‑life supply condition. E‑mail selectable alert is available for all supply conditions.
• The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some
supply conditions.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Managing the printer
247
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.
3 From the drop‑down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:
Notification
Description
Off
The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.
E‑mail Only
The printer generates an e‑mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of the
supply appears on the menus page and status page.
Warning
The printer displays the warning message and generates an e‑mail about the status of the
supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.
Continuable Stop1
The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached, and the user needs
to press a button to continue printing.
Non Continuable Stop1,2
The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The supply must be
replaced to continue printing.
1
The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2
The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.
4 Click Submit.
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring
the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 55.
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the Wipe All
Settings option. For more information, see “Erasing non‑volatile memory” on page 229.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default
settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not
affected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now > Submit
Clearing jams
248
Clearing jams
Carefully select paper and specialty media and load them properly to avoid most jams. If jams occur, then follow the
steps outlined in this chapter.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use any tool to remove a jam. Doing so could permanently damage the fuser.
Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct loading of paper
Incorrect loading of paper
• Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
• Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Clearing jams
249
• Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
1
• Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing tightly
against the paper or envelopes.
• Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.
Use recommended paper
• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.
•
•
•
•
Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.
Understanding jam messages and locations
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the printer
display. Open the doors, covers, and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam.
Clearing jams
250
Notes:
• When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer flushes blank pages or pages with partial prints to the standard bin
after a jammed page has been cleared. Check your printed output for blank pages.
• When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages. However, the Auto setting reprints
jammed pages if adequate printer memory is available.
Area
Area name
Printer control panel message
What to do
1
Upper rear door
[x]‑page jam, open upper rear
door. [202]
Open the rear door of the printer, and then remove the
jammed paper.
2
Upper door and rear
duplex area
[x]‑page jam, open upper and lower Open the rear door of the printer and the rear duplex
rear door. [231‑234]
area, and then remove the jammed paper.
3
Trays
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24x]
4
Duplex area
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear Pull out tray 1 completely, then push the front duplex
duplex. [235–239]
flap down, and then remove the jammed paper.
5
Multipurpose feeder
[x]‑page jam, clear manual
feeder. [250]
Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder, and
then remove the jammed paper.
6
Inside the printer
[x]‑page jam, lift front cover to
remove cartridge. [200–201]
Open the front cover and the multipurpose feeder,
then remove the toner cartridge and the imaging unit,
and then remove the jammed paper.
7
Standard bin
[x]‑page jam, remove standard bin Remove all paper from the standard bin, and then
jam. [203]
remove the jammed paper.
8
Automatic document [x]page jam, open automatic
feeder (ADF)
feeder top cover. [28y.xx]
Pull out the indicated tray, and then remove the
jammed paper.
Remove all paper from the ADF tray, and then remove
the jammed paper.
Clearing jams
251
[x]‑page jam, lift front cover to remove cartridge. [200–201]
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
1 Lift the front cover, and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
1
2
2 Lift the blue handle, and then pull out the toner cartridge from the printer.
3 Place the toner cartridge aside.
Clearing jams
252
4 Lift the blue handle, and then pull out the imaging unit from the printer.
1
2
5 Place the imaging unit aside on a flat, smooth surface.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of
future print jobs.
6 Pull the jammed paper gently to the right, and then remove it from the printer.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Warning—Potential Damage: The jammed paper may be covered with toner, which can stain garments and
skin.
Clearing jams
7 Install the imaging unit.
Note: Use the arrows on the side of the printer as a guide.
8 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer, and then push the blue handle back into place.
Notes:
• Align the arrows on the guides of the toner cartridge with the arrows in the printer.
• Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in.
253
Clearing jams
254
9 Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.
2
1
10 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]‑page jam, open upper rear door. [202]
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Clearing jams
1 Pull down the rear door.
2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3 Close the rear door.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]‑page jam, open upper and lower rear door. [231–234]
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
255
Clearing jams
1 Pull down the rear door.
2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3 Close the rear door.
256
Clearing jams
4 Push the back of the standard tray.
5 Press down the rear duplex flap, then firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull the paper out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
6 Insert the standard tray.
7 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]‑page jam, remove standard bin jam. [203]
1 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
257
Clearing jams
258
2 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [235–239]
1 Pull out the tray completely.
Note: Lift the tray slightly, and then pull it out.
2
3
1
2 Push down the front duplex flap, then firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull the paper to the right
and out of the printer.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
2
1
Clearing jams
259
3 Insert the tray.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24x]
1 Check which tray is indicated on the printer display, and then pull the tray.
2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
1
Clearing jams
260
3 Insert the tray.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder. [250]
1 From the multipurpose feeder, firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
2 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.
3 Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder.
Clearing jams
4 Slide the paper guide until it rests lightly against the edge of the paper.
5 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]‑page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx]
1 Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.
Note: The message is cleared when the pages are removed from the ADF tray.
2 Open the ADF cover.
3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
261
Clearing jams
262
4 Close the ADF cover.
5 Open the scanner cover.
6 If the jam is in the bottom ADF door or ADF exit bin, then open the bottom ADF door, and then firmly grasp the
jammed paper on each side.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
2
1
7 Close the bottom ADF door.
Clearing jams
263
8 Straighten the edges of the original documents, then load the documents into the ADF, and then adjust the paper
guide.
9 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
Troubleshooting
264
Troubleshooting
Understanding the printer messages
Cartridge low [88.xy]
You may need to order a replacement toner cartridge. If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to
clear the message and continue printing.
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy]
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy]
You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of
the User’s Guide.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on
the printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on
the printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on
the printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting
265
Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on
the printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.
Check tray [x] connection
Try one or more of the following:
• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
If the error occurs a second time, then:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Turn off the printer.
Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
Remove the indicated tray.
Reattach the tray.
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Turn the printer back on.
If the error occurs again, then:
1
2
3
4
Turn off the printer.
Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
Remove the tray.
Contact technical support.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and resume the job.
Close door or insert cartridge
The toner cartridge is missing or not installed properly. Insert the cartridge, and then close all doors and covers.
Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job [2yy.xx]
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.
• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner glass immediately after the last successful scan
job.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying,
faxing, or e-mailing.
• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
Troubleshooting
266
Close front door
Close the front door of the printer.
Close top access cover
Close the printer top access cover to clear the message.
Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
• Cancel current print job.
• Install additional printer memory.
Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]
Held jobs are invalidated because of the following possible changes in the printer:
•
•
•
•
The printer firmware has been updated.
The tray for the print job has been removed.
The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port.
The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a different printer
model.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Defective flash detected [51]
Try one or more of the following:
• Replace the defective flash memory card.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.
Disk full [62]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
• Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.
Disk full, scan job canceled
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue scanning.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
Troubleshooting
267
• Install a hard disk with higher capacity.
Disk must be formatted for use in this device
From the printer control panel, touch Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.
Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
• Install a hard disk with higher capacity.
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB device, and then insert a supported one.
Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.
An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.
Fax memory full
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on. If the message appears again, then contact your system support
person.
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Troubleshooting
268
Fax Station Name not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try either of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact your system
support person.
Fax Station Number not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact your system
support person.
Imaging unit low [84.xy]
You may need to order a replacement imaging unit. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear
the message and continue printing.
Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy]
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy]
You may need to replace the imaging unit very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the
User’s Guide.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Incompatible tray [x] [59]
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove the indicated tray.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the
indicated tray.
Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on
the printer control panel.
• Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in Print Properties or the Print dialog settings.
• Check if the paper size is correctly set. For example, if MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, then make sure the paper
is large enough for the data being printed.
• Check the length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray.
Troubleshooting
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Insert Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
• Insert the specified tray into the printer.
• Cancel the print job.
• Reset the active bin for a linked set of bins by selecting Reset active bin on the printer control panel.
Install duplex
Try one or more of the following:
• Install the duplex unit:
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Install the duplex unit.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Restart the printer.
• Cancel the current job.
• Reset the active bin.
Install Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
• Install the specified tray:
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Install the specified tray.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
• Cancel the print job.
• Reset the active bin.
Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation [37]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data in the printer memory.
• Install additional printer memory.
269
Troubleshooting
270
Insufficient memory to collate job [37]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin collating the
rest of the print job.
• Cancel the current print job.
Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]
Install additional printer memory or touch Continue to disable Resource Save, clear the message, and continue printing.
Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory.
Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the indicated tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the
printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the
printer cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it prints from the default paper
source.
• Cancel the current job.
Troubleshooting
271
Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size of paper.
• To use the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size of paper, then it feeds from that tray or
feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, then it prints from the default
paper source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control
panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that tray
or feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from
the default paper source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom string] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting
272
Load Manual Feeder with [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size of paper.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Maintenance kit low [80.xy]
You may need to order a maintenance kit. For more information, contact technical support or your Dell printer dealer.
If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy]
For more information, contact technical support or your Dell printer dealer.
If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [80.xy]
You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon. For more information, contact technical support or your Dell
printer dealer.
If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Memory full [38]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Cancel job to clear the message.
• Install additional printer memory.
Memory full, cannot print faxes
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes attempt to print after
the printer is restarted.
Troubleshooting
273
Memory full, cannot send faxes
1 From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and cancel the fax job.
2 Try one or more of the following:
• Reduce the fax resolution, and then resend the fax job.
• Reduce the number of pages in the fax, and then resend the fax job.
Network [x] software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn off the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact technical support or
your Dell printer dealer.
No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.
Connect the printer to an analog phone line.
Non‑Dell [supply type], see User’s Guide [33.xy]
Note: The supply type can either be a toner cartridge or imaging unit.
The printer has detected a non‑Dell supply or part installed in the printer.
Your Dell printer is designed to function best with genuine Dell supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies or parts
may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components.
All life indicators are designed to function with Dell supplies and parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if thirdparty supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Dell printer or
associated components.
Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by
the use of third-party supplies or parts are not covered by the warranty.
To accept any and all of these risks and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your printer, press
and hold
printing.
and # on the printer control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds to clear the message and continue
If you do not wish to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer, and then install
a genuine Dell supply or part.
Note: For the list of supported supplies, see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User's Guide or visit
www.dell.com/support/printers.
Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.
Troubleshooting
• Install a flash memory card with larger capacity.
Note: Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.
Paper changes needed
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Use current supplies to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.
Parallel port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Enable the parallel port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Parallel [x] > Parallel Buffer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
For more information, visit www.dell.com/support/printers or contact technical support.
Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:
• Check if the toner cartridge is missing. If missing, install the toner cartridge.
For information on installing the cartridge, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
• If the toner cartridge is installed, then remove the unresponsive toner cartridge, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the cartridge is defective. Replace the toner
cartridge.
Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:
• Check if the imaging unit is missing. If missing, install the imaging unit.
For information on installing the imaging unit, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
• If the imaging unit is installed, then remove the unresponsive imaging unit, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the imaging unit is defective. Replace the
imaging unit.
274
Troubleshooting
275
Remove defective disk [61]
Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk.
Remove packaging material, [area name]
Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the paper stack from the standard bin.
Replace all originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.
• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy]
Replace the toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then visit our Web site or contact the place where you purchased
the printer.
Replace cartridge, printer region mismatch [42.xy]
Install a suitable toner cartridge.
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy]
Replace the imaging unit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then visit our Web site or contact the place where you
purchased the printer.
Troubleshooting
276
Replace jammed originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.
• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
Replace last scanned page and jammed originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.
• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain [80.xy]
The printer is scheduled for maintenance. Contact technical support or your Dell printer dealer, and then report the
message.
Replace missing fuser [80.xx]
1 Install the missing fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
2 From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Replace roller kit [81.xx]
Try one or more of the following:
• Replace the roller kit. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Replace separator pad
Try one or more of the following:
• Replace the separator pad. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
• From the printer control panel, touch Ignore to clear the message.
Troubleshooting
277
Replace unsupported cartridge [32.xy]
Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s
Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then visit our Web site or contact the place where you purchased
the printer.
Replace unsupported imaging unit [32.xy]
Remove the imaging unit, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s
Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then visit our Web site or contact the place where you
purchased the printer.
Replace wiper
Try one or more of the following:
• Replace the fuser wiper in the printer.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Restore held jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk.
• From the printer control panel, touch Do not restore if you do not want to restore any of the print jobs.
Scan document too long
The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages. Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
Scanner automatic feeder cover open
Close the ADF cover.
Scanner disabled by admin [840.01]
Print without the scanner, or contact your system support person.
Troubleshooting
278
Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. [840.02]
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system support person.
• Touch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.
Note: This attempts to enable the scanner.
Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.
Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.
Scanner maintenance required soon, use ADF Kit [80]
Contact technical support or your Dell printer dealer, and then report the message. The printer is scheduled for
maintenance.
Serial option [x] error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
• Check that the serial cable is properly connected and is the correct one for the serial port.
• Check that the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer
and computer.
• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
Serial port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the specified serial port.
• Make sure Serial Buffer is not set to Disabled.
• From the printer control panel, set Serial Buffer to Auto in the Serial [x] menu.
Some held jobs were not restored
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to delete the indicated job.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.
Troubleshooting
279
Standard network software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact technical support or
your Dell printer dealer.
Standard USB port disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Enable the USB port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > USB Buffer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
Supply needed to complete job
Do either of the following:
• Install the missing supply to complete the job.
• Cancel the current job.
Too many disks installed [58]
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra printer hard disks.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
Too many flash options installed [58]
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra flash memory.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
Troubleshooting
280
Too many trays attached [58]
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
Tray [x] paper size unsupported
Replace with a supported paper size.
Unformatted flash detected [53]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
• Format the flash memory.
Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and needs to be replaced.
Unsupported camera mode, unplug camera and change mode
The camera mode does not support PictBridge.
Unplug the camera, change the mode and plug the camera back into the printer.
Unsupported disk
Remove the unsupported printer hard disk, and then insert a supported one.
Unsupported option in slot [x] [55]
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer controller board, and then replace it with a supported card.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
USB port [x] disabled [56]
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Notes:
• The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
Troubleshooting
281
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Solving printer problems
• “Basic printer problems” on page 281
• “Hardware and internal option problems” on page 283
• “Paper feed problems” on page 286
Basic printer problems
The printer is not responding
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Turn on the printer.
Make sure the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Step 2
Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode?
Step 3
Press the Sleep button Go to step 3.
to wake the printer
from Sleep mode or
Hibernate mode.
Go to step 4.
Plug one end of the
power cord into the
printer and the other to
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Unplug the other
electrical equipment,
and then turn on the
printer. If the printer
does not work, then
reconnect the other
electrical equipment.
Go to step 5.
Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and the
other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 4
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet.
Does other electrical equipment work?
Troubleshooting
282
Action
Yes
No
Step 5
Go to step 6.
Make sure to match the
following:
Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are inserted
in the correct ports.
• The USB symbol on
the cable with the
USB symbol on the
printer
Are the cables inserted in the correct ports?
• The appropriate
Ethernet cable with
the Ethernet port
Step 6
Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned off by a switch or breaker.
Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.
Go to step 7.
Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?
Step 7
Connect the printer
Go to step 8.
power
cord
directly
to
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
a properly grounded
power supplies, or extension cords.
electrical outlet.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power
supplies, or extension cords?
Step 8
Go to step 9.
Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the printer
and the other to the computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer,
print server, option, or other network device?
Step 9
Go to step 10.
Turn off the printer,
remove all packing
materials, then
reinstall the hardware
options, and then turn
on the printer.
Go to step 11.
Use correct printer
driver settings.
Go to step 12.
Install the correct
printer driver.
Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any packing
material.
Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material
removed?
Step 10
Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print server,
option, or other
network device.
Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer driver.
Are the port settings correct?
Step 11
Check the installed printer driver.
Is the correct printer driver installed?
Step 12
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Is the printer working?
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
Troubleshooting
283
Printer display is blank
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel.
Does Ready appear on the printer display?
Step 2
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
The problem is solved. Turn off the printer,
and then contact
technical support.
Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display?
Hardware and internal option problems
Cannot detect internal option
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
printer.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Connect the internal
option to the controller
board.
Go to step 4.
Reinstall the internal
option.
Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller board.
a Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet.
b Make sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate connector
in the controller board.
c Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded
electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board?
Step 3
Print a menu settings page, and then check to see if the internal option is
listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?
Troubleshooting
284
Action
Yes
No
Step 4
a Check if the internal option is selected.
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the printer
driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Adding available options in the print driver” on page 51.
b Resend the print job.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
Internal print server does not operate correctly
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Check if the internal
print server is
supported by the
printer.
Reinstall the internal print server.
a Remove, and then install the internal print server. For more
information, see “Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 35.
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the internal print server
is listed in the Installed Features list.
Note: An internal print
server from another
printer may not work
with this printer.
Is the internal print server listed in the Installed Features list?
Step 2
Check the cable and the internal print server connection.
Use the correct cable, and then check if it is securely connected to the
internal print server.
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
Does the internal print server operate correctly?
Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Check if you have a
supported ISP.
Make sure the Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed.
a Install the ISP. For more information, see “Installing an Internal
Solutions Port” on page 35.
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the ISP is listed in the
Installed Features list.
Is the ISP listed in the Installed Features list?
Note: An ISP from
another printer may
not work on this
printer.
Troubleshooting
285
Action
Yes
Step 2
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
Check the cable and the ISP connection.
a Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely connected to
the ISP.
b Check if the ISP solution interface cable is securely connected into the
receptacle of the controller board.
No
Note: The ISP solution interface cable and the receptacle on the
controller board are color‑coded.
Does the Internal Solutions Port operate correctly?
Tray problems
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
• Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
• If you are printing on custom‑size paper, then make sure that the
paper guides rest against the edges of the paper.
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
b Check if the tray closes properly.
Is the tray working?
Step 2
a Turn off the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
b Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Is the tray working?
Step 3
Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer.
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed in the
Installed Features list.
Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4.
Reinstall the tray. For
more information, see
the setup
documentation that
came with the tray.
Troubleshooting
286
Action
Yes
Step 4
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
Check if the tray is available in the printer driver.
No
Note: If necessary, manually add the tray in the printer driver to make it
available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding available
options in the print driver” on page 51.
Is the tray available in the printer driver?
USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Check if you have a
supported USB or
parallel interface card.
Make sure the USB or parallel interface card is installed.
a Install the USB or parallel interface card. For more information, see
“Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 35.
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the USB or parallel
interface card is listed in the Installed Features list.
Note: A USB or parallel
interface card from
another printer may
not work on this
printer.
Is the USB or parallel interface card listed in the Installed Features list?
Step 2
Check the cable and the USB or parallel interface card connection.
Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely connected to
the USB or parallel interface card.
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
Does the USB or parallel interface card operate correctly?
Paper feed problems
Jammed pages are not reprinted
Action
Yes
Turn on Jam Recovery.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery
b From the Jam Recovery menu, touch the arrows to scroll to On or
Auto.
c Touch Submit.
Do pages reprint after a jam?
No
Troubleshooting
287
Paper frequently jams
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
Go to step 2.
The problem is solved.
Go to step 3.
The problem is solved.
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
• Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the
paper.
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type.
b Insert the tray properly.
If jam recovery is enabled, then the print jobs will reprint
automatically.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Step 2
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Step 3
Contact technical
support.
a Review the tips on avoiding jams. For more information, see “Avoiding
jams” on page 248.
b Follow the recommendations, and then resend the print job.
The problem is solved.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
Action
Yes
No
Check the entire paper path for jammed paper.
a Remove any jammed paper.
Contact technical
support.
The problem is solved.
b From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Does the paper jam message remain?
Troubleshooting
288
Solving print problems
Printing problems
Confidential and other held jobs do not print
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Select one of the Print
and Hold options, and
then resend the print
job. For more
information, see
“Printing confidential
and other held jobs” on
page 90.
Open the held jobs folder on the printer display, and then verify that your
print job is listed.
Is your print job listed in the held jobs folder?
Step 2
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
• Delete the print job, and then send it again.
• For PDF files, generate a new PDF, and then print it again.
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading
multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one.
For Windows users
a Open the Print Properties folder.
b From the Print and Hold dialog, select the “Keep duplicate documents”
check box.
c Enter a PIN number.
For Macintosh users
Save each print job, name each job differently, and then send the
individual jobs to the printer.
Does the job print?
Step 3
Free up additional printer memory by deleting some of the held jobs.
Does the job print?
The problem is solved. Add additional printer
memory.
Troubleshooting
289
Envelope seals when printing
Action
Yes
Contact technical
support.
Note: Printing on envelopes with high moisture content can seal the
flaps.
b Resend the print job.
a Use envelopes that have been stored in a dry environment.
No
The problem is solved.
Does the envelope seal when printing?
Error message about reading the flash drive appears
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Insert the flash drive
into the front USB port.
Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB port.
Note: The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear USB
port.
Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB port?
Step 2
Wait until the printer is Go to step 3.
Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking green. ready, then view the
held jobs list, and then
Note: A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy.
print the documents.
Is the indicator light blinking green?
Step 3
a Check for an error message on the display.
Go to step 4.
The problem is solved.
Go to step 5.
The problem is solved.
Contact technical
support.
The problem is solved.
b Clear the message.
Does the error message still appear?
Step 4
Check if the flash drive is supported.
For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives, see
“Supported flash drives and file types” on page 87.
Does the error message still appear?
Step 5
Check if the USB port is disabled by the system support person.
Does the error message still appear?
Troubleshooting
290
Incorrect characters print
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Deactivate Hex Trace
mode.
Go to step 2.
Contact technical
support.
The problem is solved.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a Check if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray.
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode.
Note: If Ready Hex appears on the printer display, then turn off the
printer, and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace mode.
Is the printer in Hex Trace mode?
Step 2
a From the printer control panel, select Standard Network or
Network [x], and then set SmartSwitch to On.
b Resend the print job.
Do incorrect characters print?
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 2
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
a From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper size
and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, open Printing Preferences or
the Print dialog, and then specify the paper type.
b Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 4
a Check if the trays are not linked.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
Troubleshooting
291
Large jobs do not collate
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a From the Finishing menu on the printer control panel, set Collate to
(1,2,3) (1,2,3).
b Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
Step 2
a From the printer software, set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Note: Setting Collate to (1,1,1) (2,2,2) in the software overrides the
setting in the Finishing menu.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
Step 3
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size
of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages
in the job.
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print
Action
Yes
No
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 1
a Check if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed all fonts.
For more information, see the documentation that came with Adobe
Acrobat.
b Generate a new PDF file, and then resend the print job.
Do the files print?
Step 2
a Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
b Click File > Print > Advanced > Print As Image > OK > OK.
Do the files print?
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
Troubleshooting
292
Print jobs do not print
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a From the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog and
check if you have selected the correct printer.
Note: If the printer is not the default printer, then you must select
the printer for each document that you want to print.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 2
a Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears
on the printer display.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
Step 3
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
If an error message appears on the printer display, then clear the message.
Note: The printer continues to print after clearing the message.
Do the jobs print?
Step 4
a Check if the ports (USB, serial, or Ethernet) are working and if the
cables are securely connected to the computer and the printer.
The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
Note: For more information, see the setup documentation that
came with the printer.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
Step 5
a Turn off the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
b Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
Do the jobs print?
Step 6
a Remove, and then reinstall the printer software. For more
information, see “Installing the printer” on page 50.
Note: The printer software is available at
www.dell.com/support/printers.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
Troubleshooting
293
Print job takes longer than expected
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Change the environmental settings of the printer.
a From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings
b Select Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode, and then select Off.
Note: Disabling Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the
consumption of energy or supplies, or both.
Did the job print?
Step 2
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Reduce the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of
images, and the number of pages in the print job, and then resend the job
Did the job print?
Step 3
a Remove held jobs stored in the printer memory.
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
Step 4
a Disable the Page Protect feature.
The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Off
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
Step 5
a Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are
secure. For more information, see the setup documentation that came
with the printer.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
Step 6
Install additional printer memory, and then resend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
Troubleshooting
294
Printing slows down
Notes:
• When printing using narrow paper, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
• The printer speed may be reduced when printing for long periods of time, or printing at elevated temperatures.
Action
Yes
No
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 1
a Make sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the fuser
type.
Note: Use a 110-volt fuser for printing on letter-size paper and a
220-volt fuser for printing on A4‑size paper.
b Resend the print job.
Does the print speed increase?
Step 2
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
a Replace the fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that
came with the part.
b Resend the print job.
Does the print speed increase?
Tray linking does not work
Notes:
• The trays can detect paper length.
• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper
Size/Type menu.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Open the trays, and then check if they contain paper of the same size
and type.
• Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for the size
of the paper loaded in each tray.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
Troubleshooting
Action
295
Yes
No
The problem is solved. Contact technical
Step 2
support.
a From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be linked.
Note: The paper size and type must match for trays to be linked.
b Resend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
Unexpected page breaks occur
Action
Yes
Increase the printing timeout.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
The problem is solved. Check the original file
for manual page
breaks.
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
b Increase the Print Timeout setting, and then touch Submit.
c Resend the print job.
Did the file print correctly?
Print quality problems
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
No
Troubleshooting
296
Action
Yes
Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Print a font sample list to check if the fonts you are using are supported
by the printer.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
No
The problem is solved.
> Reports > Print Fonts
2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
b Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you
want to use. For more information, contact your system support
person.
c Resend the print job.
Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges?
Contact technical
Step 2
a Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you support.
want to use on your computer. For more information, contact your
system support person.
b Resend the print job.
The problem is solved.
Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges?
Clipped pages or images
Leading edge
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge
Action
Yes
Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the paper loaded.
b Resend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
No
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting
297
Action
Yes
No
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Do one or more of the
following:
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
• Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.
Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray?
• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
size specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from
Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Go to step 4.
The problem is solved.
Contact technical
support.
The problem is solved.
Is the page or image clipped?
Step 4
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge.
2 Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Compressed images appear on prints
Note: Printing on letter-size paper using a 220-volt fuser compresses images.
Action
Yes
No
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 1
a Make sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the fuser
type.
Note: Use a 110-volt fuser for printing on letter-size paper and a
220-volt fuser for printing on A4‑size paper.
b Resend the print job.
Do compressed images still appear?
Troubleshooting
298
Action
Yes
No
The problem is solved. Contact technical
Step 2
support.
a Replace the fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that
came with the part.
b Resend the print job.
Do compressed images still appear?
Gray background on prints
Leading edge
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a From the Quality Menu on the printer control panel, decrease the
toner darkness.
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
b Resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
Step 2
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Reinstall the imaging unit and the toner cartridge.
a Remove the toner cartridge.
b Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light
can cause print quality problems.
c Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
d Resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
Step 3
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
Troubleshooting
299
Horizontal voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
Go to step 2.
The problem is solved.
Step 2
Go to step 3.
a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.
The problem is solved.
b Resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
b Resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Step 3
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Go to step 4.
The problem is solved.
Contact technical
support.
The problem is solved.
2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Step 4
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Troubleshooting
300
Incorrect margins on prints
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Action
Yes
No
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 1
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the paper size loaded.
b Resend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size in the Paper menu to
match the paper loaded in the tray.
Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3.
Do one or more of the
following:
• Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.
• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
size specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from
Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
Troubleshooting
301
Paper curl
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Adjust the width and
length guides.
Go to step 3.
Specify the paper type
and weight from the
tray settings to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
Go to step 4.
The problem is solved.
Go to step 5.
The problem is solved.
Contact technical
support.
The problem is solved.
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for
the size of the paper loaded.
Are the width and length guides positioned correctly?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in
the tray?
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Step 4
a Remove the paper from the tray, and then turn it over.
b Resend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Printer is printing blank pages
Troubleshooting
302
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a Check if there is packing material left on the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Go to step 2.
The problem is solved.
Go to step 3.
The problem is solved.
Contact technical
support.
The problem is solved.
2 Check if the packing material is properly removed from the imaging
unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Step 2
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Step 3
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Printer is printing solid black pages
Troubleshooting
303
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Go to step 2.
The problem is solved.
Contact technical
support.
The problem is solved.
Yes
No
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Print irregularities
Leading edge
)
)
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge
Action
Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
The problem is solved.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Specify the paper size
and type from the tray
settings to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
Go to step 4.
The problem is solved.
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper loaded in
the tray?
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Troubleshooting
304
Action
Yes
Step 4
From the printer
Go to step 5.
control panel, set the
paper texture in the
Paper menu to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.
No
Go to step 6.
The problem is solved.
Contact technical
support or your Dell
printer dealer.
The problem is solved.
Yes
No
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Step 6
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Print is too dark
Action
Go to step 2.
Step 1
a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the toner
darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting
Action
305
Yes
Go to step 3.
Step 2
a From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture and weight
in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
No
Do one or more of the
following:
• Specify the paper
type, texture, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
type, texture and
weight specified in
the tray settings.
Go to step 4.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
The problem is solved.
Is the print still too dark?
Step 4
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.
From the printer
Go to step 5.
control panel, change
the texture settings in
the Paper Texture
menu to match the
paper you are printing
on.
Go to step 6.
The problem is solved.
Contact technical
support.
The problem is solved.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Step 6
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Troubleshooting
306
Print is too light
Action
Yes
Go to step 2.
Step 1
a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, increase the toner
darkness.
No
The problem is solved.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 3.
Change the paper type,
texture, and weight to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Go to step 4.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture,
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
The problem is solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Is the print still too light?
Step 4
Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
From the printer
Go to step 5.
control panel, change
the texture settings in
the Paper Texture
menu to match the
paper you are printing
on.
Go to step 6.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting
307
Action
Yes
No
Step 6
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Go to step 7.
The problem is solved.
Contact technical
support.
The problem is solved.
Yes
No
2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Step 7
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Repeating defects appear on prints
Action
Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Replace the imaging unit if the distance between the defects is equal
to any of the following:
The problem is solved.
• 47.8 mm (1.88 in.)
• 96.8 mm (3.81 in.)
• 28.5 mm (1.12 in.)
b Resend the print job.
Do repeating defects still appear on prints?
Contact technical
Step 2
a Replace the fuser if the distance between the defects is equal to either support.
of the following:
• 94.25 mm (3.71 in.)
• 95.2 mm (3.75 in.)
b Resend the print job.
Do repeating defects still appear on prints?
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting
308
Shadow images appear on prints
Leading edge
A
AB
BC
CD
D
A
B
C
D
ABCD
Trailing edge
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Load paper with the
correct paper type and
weight in the tray.
Go to step 3.
Change the paper
loaded in the tray to
match the paper type
and weight specified in
the tray settings.
Go to step 4.
The problem is solved.
Contact technical
support.
The problem is solved.
Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray.
Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper loaded?
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Step 4
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Skewed print
)E
) D
ABC
E
ABCD E
ABCD
Troubleshooting
Action
309
Yes
Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the size of the paper loaded.
b Resend the print job.
No
The problem is solved.
Is the print still skewed?
Step 2
a Check if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the tray.
Contact technical
support.
The problem is solved.
Yes
No
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action
Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the tray or feeder from
Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
The problem is solved.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Change the paper type
and weight to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
Go to step 4.
The problem is solved.
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in
the tray?
Step 3
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Troubleshooting
310
Action
Yes
No
Step 4
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Go to step 5.
The problem is solved.
Contact technical
support.
The problem is solved.
Yes
No
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
Leading edge
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge
Action
Go to step 2.
Step 1
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture,
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
The problem is solved.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper texture, type, and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper texture, type, and weight match the paper in the tray?
Go to step 3.
Do one or more of the
following:
• Specify the paper
texture, type, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
texture, type, and
weight specified in
the tray settings.
Troubleshooting
311
Action
Yes
No
Step 3
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Go to step 4.
The problem is solved.
Go to step 5.
The problem is solved.
Contact technical
support or your Dell
printer dealer.
The problem is solved.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
The problem is solved.
Contact technical
support or your Dell
printer dealer.
The problem is solved.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Step 4
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Toner fog or background shading appears on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Reinstall the imaging unit.
a Remove, and then install the imaging unit.
b Resend the print job.
Does fog or shading appear on prints?
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Does fog or shading appear on prints?
Troubleshooting
312
Toner rubs off
Leading edge
ABC
DEF
Trailing edge
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Specify the paper type,
texture, and weight
from the tray settings
to match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Contact technical
support or your Dell
printer dealer.
The problem is solved.
Action
Yes
No
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Contact technical
support.
The problem is solved.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Set the paper type to
Transparency.
Contact technical
support.
The problem is solved.
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the paper type,
texture, and weight.
Do the paper type, texture, and weight match the paper loaded in the
tray?
Step 2
Resend the print job.
Does the toner still rub off?
Toner specks appear on prints
Do toner specks appear on prints?
Transparency print quality is poor
From the printer control panel, set the paper type in the Paper menu to
match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency?
Step 2
a Check if you are using a recommended type of transparency.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print quality still poor?
Troubleshooting
313
Uneven print density
Action
Yes
No
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Contact technical
support.
The problem is solved.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
Go to step 2.
The problem is solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 2
a From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
The problem is solved.
Is the print density uneven?
Vertical voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Step 3
Go to step 4.
Check if you are using a recommended type of paper.
a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.
b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting
314
Action
Yes
No
Step 4
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Go to step 5.
The problem is solved.
Contact technical
support.
The problem is solved.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Clear the error or status Go to step 2.
message.
2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Solving copy problems
•
•
•
•
“Copier does not respond” on page 314
“Partial document or photo copies” on page 315
“Poor copy quality” on page 315
“Scanner unit does not close” on page 317
Copier does not respond
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Does an error or status message appear?
Step 2
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Go to step 3.
Connect the power
cord to the printer and
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it back
on.
Step 3
Did Performing Self Test and Ready appear?
Troubleshooting
315
Partial document or photo copies
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Place the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.
Go to step 3.
Change the paper size
setting to match the
paper loaded in the
tray, or load the tray
with paper that
matches the paper size
setting.
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Step 2
Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper loaded in the
tray.
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the Paper
Size setting.
Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
The problem is solved. Contact technical
Step 3
support.
a Specify the paper size. Depending on your operating system, specify
the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do copies print properly?
Poor copy quality
Action
Yes
Step 1
Clear the error or status Go to step 2.
message.
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
No
Does an error or status message appear?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Increase the scan
resolution setting for a
higher‑quality output.
Go to step 4.
See “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on
page 233.
Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Step 3
If dark marks appear on prints, then clean the scanner glass and the ADF
glass using a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Troubleshooting
316
Action
Yes
No
Step 4
Go to step 5.
See “Print quality
problems” on
page 295.
Go to step 6.
Place the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.
Go to step 7.
Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.
Go to step 8.
The problem is solved.
Go to step 9.
The problem is solved.
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
a From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.
b From the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.
c If the print remains faded, then replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Step 5
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Step 6
Check the copy settings.
From the Copy screen, check if the Content Type and Content Source
settings are correct for the document being scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Step 7
Check for patterns on prints.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > select a lower
setting
Note: Make sure no scaling is being selected.
b Resend the copy job.
Do patterns appear on prints?
Step 8
Check for missing or faded text on prints.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging
b Adjust the settings:
• Sharpness—Increase the current setting.
• Contrast—Increase the current setting.
c Resend the copy job.
Do prints have missing or faded text?
Troubleshooting
317
Action
Yes
No
Step 9
Contact technical
support.
The problem is solved.
Action
Yes
No
Check if there are no obstructions between the scanner unit and the
printer.
a Lift the scanner unit.
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
Check for washed‑out or overexposed output.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging
b Adjust the settings of the following:
• Background Removal—Reduce the current setting.
• Shadow Detail—Reduce the current setting.
c Resend the copy job.
Do pages show washed‑out or overexposed prints?
Scanner unit does not close
b Remove any obstruction that keeps the scanner unit open.
c Lower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close properly?
Solving fax problems
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Caller ID is not shown” on page 318
“Cannot send or receive a fax” on page 318
“Can receive but not send faxes” on page 320
“Can send but not receive faxes” on page 321
“Fax and e-mail functions are not set up” on page 322
“Received fax has poor print quality” on page 322
Troubleshooting
318
Caller ID is not shown
Action
Yes
No
Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line is
subscribed to the caller ID service.
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
Notes:
• If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, then you may
have to change the default setting. There are two settings
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2).
• The availability of these settings in the Fax menu depends on
whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID
patterns.
• Contact your telephone company to determine which pattern or
switch setting to use.
Does the caller ID appear?
Cannot send or receive a fax
Action
Yes
Step 1
Clear the error or status Go to step 2.
message.
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
No
Is there an error or status message on the display?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Connect the power
cord to the printer and
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Go to step 4.
Turn on the printer,
and then wait until
Ready appears on the
display.
Go to step 5.
Securely connect the
cables.
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 3
Check the power.
Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears
on the display.
Is the printer turned on, and does Ready appear on the display?
Step 4
Check the printer connections.
If applicable, check if the cable connections for the following
equipment are secure:
• Telephone
• Handset
• Answering machine
Are the cable connections secure?
Troubleshooting
319
Action
Yes
No
Step 5
a Check the telephone wall jack.
1 Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack.
The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
2 Listen for a dial tone.
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone cable
into the wall jack.
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug the telephone cable
into a different wall jack.
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
Step 6
Go to step 7.
Connect the printer to
an analog phone
service or the correct
digital connector.
Go to step 8.
• Try calling the fax
Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the correct
digital connector.
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected
to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used.
• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the
printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port) on an
ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an Rinterface port, contact your ISDN provider.
• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will
support analog use. For more information, contact your DSL
provider.
• If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are
connecting to an analog connection on the PBX. If none exists, then
consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.
Is the printer connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital
connector?
Step 7
Check for a dial tone.
Did you hear a dial tone?
number to make
sure that it is
working properly.
• If the telephone
line is being used by
another device,
then wait until the
other device is
finished before
sending a fax.
• If you are using the
On Hook Dial
feature, then turn
up the volume to
check if you hear a
dial tone.
Troubleshooting
320
Action
Yes
No
Step 8
The problem is solved. Go to step 9.
Temporarily disconnect other equipment (such as answering machines,
computers with modems, or telephone line splitters) between the printer
and the telephone line, and then try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is solved. Go to step 10.
Step 9
a Temporarily disable call waiting. Contact your telephone company to
obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling call waiting.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is solved. Go to step 11.
Step 10
a Temporarily disable voice mail service. For more information, contact
your telephone company.
Note: If you want to use both voice mail and the printer, then
consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
Step 11
Scan the original document one page at a time.
a Dial the fax number.
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
b Scan the document one page at a time.
Can you send or receive a fax?
Can receive but not send faxes
Action
Yes
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Check if the printer is in Fax mode.
From the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode, and
then send the fax.
Note: The Multi Send application does not support the XPS output type.
To use XPS, use the regular faxing method.
Can you send faxes?
No
Troubleshooting
321
Action
Yes
No
Step 2
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Load the original document properly.
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray
or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray.
Place these items on the scanner glass.
Can you send faxes?
Step 3
Set up the shortcut number properly.
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
• Check if the shortcut number has been set for the telephone number
that you want to dial.
• Dial the telephone number manually.
Can you send faxes?
Can send but not receive faxes
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Check the tray or feeder.
If empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 2
Check the ring count delay settings.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP
address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods,
such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to
load the Web page correctly.
b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
c In the “Rings to Answer” field, enter the number of times you want
the phone to ring before the printer answers.
d Click Submit.
Can you receive faxes?
Troubleshooting
322
Action
Yes
Step 3
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
Replace the toner cartridge. For more information, see the instruction
sheet that came with the supply.
No
Can you receive faxes?
Fax and e-mail functions are not set up
Notes:
• Before you troubleshoot, check if the fax cables are connected.
• The indicator light is blinking red until you set up fax and e‑mail.
Action
Yes
No
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Run initial setup > Yes >
Submit
b Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
The “Select your language” screen appears on the printer display.
c
d
e
f
Select a language, and then touch
.
Select a country or region, and then touch Next.
Select a time zone, and then touch Next.
Select Fax and E‑mail, and then touch Next.
Are fax and e‑mail functions set up?
Received fax has poor print quality
Action
Yes
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
a Check if the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
b Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.
c Resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
No
Troubleshooting
323
Action
Yes
No
Step 2
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP
address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods,
such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to
load the Web page correctly.
• Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then
locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
c In the Max Speed menu, click one of the following:
• 2400
• 4800
• 9600
• 14400
• 33600
d Click Submit, and then resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
Step 3
Replace the toner cartridge.
When Cartridge low [88.xy] appears, replace the cartridge,
and then resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
Solving scanner problems
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Cannot scan from a computer” on page 324
“Partial document or photo scans” on page 324
“Poor scanned image quality” on page 324
“Scan job was not successful” on page 325
“Scanner unit does not close” on page 326
“Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer” on page 326
“The scanner does not respond” on page 327
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
Troubleshooting
324
Cannot scan from a computer
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 3.
Go to step 2.
Clear the error
message.
Go to step 3.
Make sure the printer is turned on and that Ready appears on the printer
display before scanning a job.
Does Ready appear before scanning the job?
Step 2
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Contact technical
Check the cable connections between the printer and the print server to support.
make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with
the printer.
Step 3
Tighten the cable
connections.
Are the cable connections between the printer and the print server
secure?
Partial document or photo scans
Action
Yes
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Contact technical
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner support.
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
No
Load the document or
photo loaded
facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.
Poor scanned image quality
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Clear the error
message.
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Increase the scan
resolution settings for a
higher‑quality output.
Check if an error message appears on the display.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Step 2
Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Troubleshooting
325
Action
Yes
No
Step 3
Go to step 4.
See “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on
page 233.
Go to step 5.
Place the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.
Go to step 6.
See “Print quality
problems” on
page 295.
Go to step 7.
Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.
Problem solved.
Contact technical
support.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Connect the cables
properly.
Change the file name.
Go to step 3.
Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint‑free cloth
dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Step 4
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Step 5
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
• From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.
• From the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.
• When the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Step 6
Check the scan settings.
From the Scan screen, make sure the Content Type and Content Source
settings are correct for the document being scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Step 7
Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher‑quality output.
Did the increased resolution produce a higher‑quality output?
Scan job was not successful
Check the cable connections.
Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to the
computer and the printer.
Are the cables securely connected?
Step 2
Check if the file name is already in use.
Is the file name already in use?
Troubleshooting
326
Action
Yes
No
Step 3
Close the file you are
scanning.
Go to step 4.
Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another
application or being used by another user.
Is the file you want to scan open by another application or user?
Contact technical
Check if either the Append time stamp or the Overwrite existing file check support.
box is selected in the destination configuration settings.
Step 4
Is the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box selected
in the destination configuration settings?
Select the Append time
stamp or Overwrite
existing file check box
in the destination
configuration settings.
Scanner unit does not close
Action
Yes
No
Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit.
a Lift the scanner unit.
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
b Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
c Lower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close correctly?
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
The problem is solved.
Contact technical
support.
The problem is solved.
Check if other applications are interfering with the scan.
Close all applications that are not being used.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Step 2
Select a lower scan resolution.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Troubleshooting
327
The scanner does not respond
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Turn on the printer.
Go to step 3.
Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print server,
option, or other
network device.
Go to step 4.
Connect the power
cord to the printer and
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.
Go to step 5.
Check if the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Step 2
Check if the printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the
computer, print server, option, or other network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer,
print server, option, or other network device?
Step 3
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 4
Check if the electrical outlet is turned off by a switch or breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?
Step 5
Connect the printer
Go to step 6.
power
cord
directly
to
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
a properly grounded
power supplies, or extension cords.
electrical outlet.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power
supplies, or extension cords?
Step 6
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet.
Are the other electrical equipment working?
Step 7
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Are the printer and scanner working?
Unplug the other
Go to step 7.
electrical equipment
and turn on the printer.
If the printer does not
work, then reconnect
the other electrical
equipment and then go
to step 6.
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
Troubleshooting
328
Solving home screen application problems
An application error has occurred
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Contact technical
support.
Check the system log for relevant details.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer home screen.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages, and then
locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by
periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
b Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > System tab > Log.
c From the Filter menu, select an application status.
d From the Application menu, select an application, and then click
Submit.
Does an error message appear in the log?
Step 2
Resolve the error.
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
Is the application working now?
Embedded Web Server does not open
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Type the correct
printer IP address in the
address field of your
Web browser.
Make sure the printer IP address is correct.
View the printer IP address:
• From the printer home screen
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then
Note: Depending on
the network settings,
you may need to type
“https://” instead of
“http://” before the
printer IP address to
access the Embedded
Web Server.
finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by
periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Is the printer IP address correct?
Step 2
Check if the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Go to step 3.
Turn on the printer.
Troubleshooting
329
Action
Yes
No
Step 3
Go to step 4.
Contact your system
support person.
Go to step 5.
Tighten the cable
connection.
Go to step 6.
Contact your system
support person.
Check if the network connection is working.
Is the network connection working?
Step 4
Make sure the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with
the printer.
Are the cable connections to the printer and print server secure?
Step 5
Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers.
Note: Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain
Web sites including the Embedded Web Server.
Are the Web proxy servers disabled?
Step 6
The problem is solved. Contact technical
support.
Access the Embedded Web Server again by typing the correct IP address
in the address field.
Did the Embedded Web Server open?
Contacting technical support
When you call technical support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the printer display, and
the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and the service tag number or express service code. For more information,
see the label on the inside top front cover or at the back of the printer. The service tag number is also listed on the
menu settings page.
For more information, check the Dell support Web site at www.dell.com/support/printers.
Appendix
330
Appendix
Dell Technical Support Policy
Technician‑assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer in the troubleshooting
process and provides for restoration of the Operating System, application software and hardware drivers to the original
default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the verification of appropriate functionality of the printer and all
Dell‑installed hardware. In addition to this technician assisted technical support, online technical support is available
at Dell Support. Additional technical support options may be available for purchase.
Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell‑installed software and peripherals. Support for
third‑party software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer, including those purchased and/or
installed through Software & Peripherals (DellWare), ReadyWare, and Custom Factory Integration (CFI/DellPlus).
Contacting Dell
You can access Dell Support at www.dell.com/support/printers.
You can contact Dell electronically using the following addresses:
• World Wide Web
www.dell.com/
www.dell.com/ap/ (Asian/Pacific countries only)
www.dell.com/jp/ (Japan only)
www.euro.dell.com (Europe only)
www.dell.com/la/ (Latin American and Caribbean countries)
www.dell.ca (Canada only)
• Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP)
ftp.dell.com
Log in as user: anonymous, and use your email address as your password.
• Electronic Support Service
mobile_support@us.dell.com
support@us.dell.com
la-techsupport@dell.com (Latin America and Caribbean countries only)
apsupport@dell.com (Asian/Pacific countries only)
support.jp.dell.com (Japan only)
support.euro.dell.com (Europe only)
• Electronic Quote Service
apmarketing@dell.com (Asian/Pacific countries only)
sales_canada@dell.com (Canada only)
Appendix
331
Warranty and Return Policy
Dell Inc. (“Dell”) manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new
in accordance with industry‑standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty for your printer, refer to the
Product Information Guide.
Index
332
Index
Numerics
2100‑sheet tray
installing 46
loading paper 64
550‑sheet tray
installing 46
loading 57
Symbols
[x]‑ page jam, open upper rear
door. [202] 254
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder.
[250] 260
[x]‑page jam, lift front cover to
remove cartridge. [200–201] 251
[x]‑page jam, open automatic
feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 261
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x].
[24x] 259
[x]‑page jam, open upper and lower
rear door. [231–234] 255
[x]‑page jam, remove standard bin
jam. [203] 257
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear
duplex. [235–239] 258
A
accessing Status Monitor
Center 245
accessing the Embedded Web
Server 21
Active NIC menu 157
adapter plug 123
adding hardware options
print driver 51
ADF
copying using 93
adjusting brightness
Embedded Web Server 226
printer display 226
adjusting copy quality 98
adjusting display brightness 226
adjusting Sleep mode 225
adjusting toner darkness 85
advanced options
copy options 104
e‑mail options 112
fax options 136
FTP options 143
AirPrint
using 88
answering machine
setting up 115
AppleTalk menu 162
applications
home screen 23
understanding 22
attaching cables 48
available internal options 28
avoiding jams 82
avoiding paper jams 248
B
blocking junk faxes 132
buttons, printer control panel 16
buttons, touch screen
using 19
C
cables
Ethernet 48
USB 48
canceling a print job
from a computer 91
from the printer control panel 91
canceling an e-mail 110
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 328
Card Copy
setting up 23
card stock
loading 70
tips 77
Cartridge low [88.xy] 264
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 264
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 264
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] load [orientation] 264
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] load [orientation] 264
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 264
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 265
Check tray [x] connection 265
checking an unresponsive
printer 281
checking status of parts and
supplies 235
checking the status of parts and
supplies 235
checking the virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 245
checking virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 245
cleaning
exterior of the printer 232
scanner glass 233
cleaning the printer 232
Close door or insert cartridge 265
Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job
[2yy.xx] 265
Close front door 266
Close top access cover 266
collate
copy options 103
collating copies 99
Complex page, some data may not
have printed [39] 266
compressed images appear on
prints 297
confidential data
information on securing 231
confidential jobs
modifying print settings 90
confidential print jobs 89
printing from a Macintosh
computer 90
printing from Windows 90
Confidential Print menu 172
Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored [57] 266
configuration information
wireless network 52
Configure MP menu 145
Index
configuring
supply notifications, imaging
unit 246
supply notifications, maintenance
kit 246
supply notifications, toner
cartridge 246
configuring e‑mail settings 106
configuring port settings 54
configuring supply notifications 246
connecting printer to distinctive
ring service 127
connecting to a wireless network
using PIN (Personal Identification
Number) method 53
using Push Button Configuration
method 53
using the Embedded Web
Server 54
using wireless setup wizard 53
conservation settings
brightness, adjusting 226
Eco‑Mode 224
Quiet Mode 224
Sleep mode 225
contacting technical support 329
content
e‑mail settings 111
content source
e‑mail settings 111
fax options 134
content type
e‑mail settings 111
fax options 134
control panel, printer 16
indicator light 16
Sleep button light 16
controller board
accessing 28
copies
copy options 103
copy job, canceling
using the ADF 102
using the scanner glass 102
copy options
advanced options 104
collate 103
copies 103
darkness 103
Save As Shortcut 104
sides (duplex) 103
333
copy quality
adjusting 98
copy screen
content source 103
content type 103
options 102, 103
Copy Settings menu 184
copy troubleshooting
copier does not respond 314
partial document or photo
copies 315
poor copy quality 315
poor scanned image quality 324
scanner unit does not
close 317, 326
copying
adding an overlay message 101
adjusting quality 98
canceling a copy job 102
collating copies 99
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 95
custom job 100
different paper sizes 96
enlarging 98
inserting a header or footer 101
multiple pages on one sheet 100
on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 97
on letterhead 95
on transparencies 94
photos 94
placing separator sheets between
copies 99
quick copy 93
reducing 98
selecting a tray 96
to a different size 96
using the ADF 93
using the scanner glass 94
copying different paper sizes 96
copying multiple pages on one
sheet 100
copying on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 97
copying on transparencies 94
creating a fax destination shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 131
creating an FTP shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 137
Custom Names menu 154
custom paper type
assigning 75
custom paper type name
creating 75
Custom Scan Sizes menu 155
Custom Type [x]
changing name 75
Custom Types menu 154
D
darkness
copy options 103
e‑mail options 111
fax options 135
scan options 142
date and time, fax
setting 128
daylight saving time, setting 128
Default Source menu 145
Defective flash detected [51] 266
delayed send
fax options 135
Dell Mobile Print
using 88
device and network settings
information
erasing 229
different paper sizes, copying 96
Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
fax setup 119
digital telephone service
fax setup 121
directory list
printing 91
Disk full 62 266
Disk full, scan job canceled 266
Disk must be formatted for use in
this device 267
disk wiping 229
display troubleshooting
printer display is blank 283
display, printer control panel 16
adjusting brightness 226
disposing of printer hard disk 228
distinctive ring service, fax
connecting to 127
documents, printing
from Macintosh 85
from Windows 85
DSL filter 119
duplexing 97
Index
E
Eco‑Mode setting 224
Edit Security Setups menu 170
embedded solutions information
erasing 229
Embedded Web Server
accessing 21
checking the status of parts 235
checking the status of
supplies 235
creating a fax destination
shortcut 131
creating an FTP shortcut 137
creating e‑mail shortcuts 107
initial fax setup 114
modifying confidential print
settings 90
problem accessing 328
scanning to a computer using 140
setting up e‑mail alerts 246
Embedded Web Server — Security:
Administrator’s Guide
where to find 231
encrypting the printer hard
disk 230
enlarging a copy 98
envelopes
loading 70
tips on using 77
environmental settings
display brightness, adjusting 226
Eco‑Mode 224
Quiet Mode 224
Sleep mode 225
Erase Temporary Data Files
menu 173
erasing hard disk memory 229
erasing non‑volatile memory 229
erasing volatile memory 228
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB. 267
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 267
Ethernet network
preparing to set up for Ethernet
printing 51
Ethernet port 48
Ethernet setup
preparing for an 51
334
exporting a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 26
EXT port 48
exterior of the printer
cleaning 232
e‑mail
canceling 110
e‑mail alerts
low supply levels 246
paper jam 246
setting up 246
e‑mail function
setting up 106
e‑mail options
advanced options 112
darkness 111
message 110
original size 111
page setup 112
recipient(s) 110
resolution 111
Save As Shortcut 110
send as 111
subject 110
e‑mail screen
options 110, 112
E‑mail Settings menu 197
e‑mail shortcuts, creating
using the Embedded Web
Server 107
e‑mail, sending
using a shortcut number 108
using the address book 109
e‑mailing
adding message line 109
adding subject line 109
changing output file type 109
configuring e‑mail settings 106
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 107
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 107
setting up e‑mail function 106
using a shortcut number 108
using the address book 109
using the printer control
panel 108
F
factory defaults
restoring 247
fax
sending 129, 130
sending at a scheduled time 130
fax and e‑mail functions
setting up 322
fax and e‑mail functions are not set
up 322
fax log
viewing 132
Fax memory full 267
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
menu 188
fax name, setting 127
fax number, setting 127
fax options
advanced options 136
content source 134
content type 134
darkness 135
delayed send 135
page setup 135
resolution 135
scan preview 135
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 267
fax port 48
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system administrator. 267
fax setup
country‑ or region‑specific 123
digital telephone service 121
DSL connection 119
standard telephone line
connection 115
VoIP 120
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system administrator. 268
Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system administrator. 268
fax troubleshooting
caller ID is not shown 318
can receive but not send
faxes 320
can send but not receive
faxes 321
cannot send or receive a fax 318
received fax has poor print
quality 322
faxing
blocking junk faxes 132
canceling a fax job 133
changing resolution 131
Index
configuring the printer to observe
daylight saving time 128
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 131
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 131
distinctive ring service 127
fax setup 114
forwarding faxes 134
holding faxes 133
making a fax lighter or darker 132
sending a fax at a scheduled
time 130
sending using the printer control
panel 128
setting the date and time 128
setting the fax number 127
setting the outgoing fax name 127
viewing a fax log 132
file name
scan options 141
finding more information about the
printer 10
finding printer IP address 21
Finishing menu 212
firmware card 28
flash drive
printing from 86
Flash Drive menu 206
flash drives
supported file types 87
font sample list
printing 91
Forms and Favorites
setting up 23
forwarding faxes 134
FTP
FTP options 141
FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 138
FTP address, scanning to
using a shortcut number 138
using the printer control
panel 138
FTP options
advanced options 143
FTP 141
FTP Settings menu 202
335
G
green settings
Eco‑Mode 224
Quiet Mode 224
H
hardware options, adding
print driver 51
held jobs 89
printing from a Macintosh
computer 90
printing from Windows 90
Help menu 222
hiding icons on the home screen 22
holding faxes 133
home screen
customizing 22
hiding icons 22
showing icons 22
home screen applications
configuring 23
finding information 23
home screen buttons and icons
description 17
HTML menu 220
I
icons on the home screen
hiding 22
showing 22
Image menu 221
Imaging unit low [84.xy] 268
Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy] 268
Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated
pages remain [84.xy] 268
importing a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 26
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 268
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
source] [34] 268
individual settings information
erasing 229
initial fax setup 114
using the Embedded Web
Server 114
Insert Tray [x] 269
inserting a header or footer 101
Install duplex 269
Install Tray [x] 269
installing an Internal Solutions
Port 35
installing an optional card 33
installing options
order of installation 45
installing printer 50
installing printer hard disk 39
installing the 2100‑sheet tray 46
installing the 550‑sheet tray 46
Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment operation
[37] 269
Insufficient memory to collate job
[37] 270
Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 270
Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 270
Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored [37] 270
internal options 28
internal print server
troubleshooting 284
Internal Solutions Port
changing port settings 54
installing 35
troubleshooting 284
IP address of computer
finding 21
IP address, printer
finding 21
IPv6 menu 161
J
jams
accessing 249
avoiding 248
messages 249
jams, clearing
behind rear door 255
duplex 258
in automatic document feeder top
cover 261
in manual feeder 260
in tray [x] 259
inside the printer 251
rear door 254
standard bin jam 257
Job Accounting menu 214
Index
L
labels, paper
tips 78
letterhead
copying on 95
loading, 2100‑sheet tray 64
loading, multipurpose
feeder 70, 78
loading, trays 57, 78
light, indicator 16
line filter 119
LINE port 48
linking trays 74, 75
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 270
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name] [paper orientation] 270
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 271
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 271
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 271
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] [paper orientation] 271
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 272
Load manual feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 272
loading
card stock 70
envelopes 70
letterhead in 2100‑sheet tray 64
letterhead in multipurpose
feeder 70
letterhead in trays 57
multipurpose feeder 70
transparencies 70
loading letterhead
paper orientation 78
loading paper
2100‑sheet tray 64
550‑sheet tray 57
M
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 272
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 272
336
Maintenance kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 272
making copies using paper from
selected tray 96
managing printer messages 245
memory
types installed on printer 228
memory card 28
installing 32
Memory full [38] 272
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 272
Memory full, cannot send
faxes 273
menu settings page
printing 55
menus
Active NIC 157
AppleTalk 162
Confidential Print 172
Configure MP 145
Copy Settings 184
Custom Names 154
Custom Scan Sizes 155
Custom Types 154
Default Source 145
diagram of 144
Edit Security Setups 170
Erase Temporary Data Files 173
E‑mail Settings 197
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 188
Finishing 212
Flash Drive 206
FTP Settings 202
Help 222
HTML 220
Image 221
IPv6 161
Job Accounting 214
Miscellaneous Security
Settings 171
Network [x] 158
Network Card 159
Network Reports 159
Paper Loading 153
Paper Size/Type 146
Paper Texture 149
Paper Weight 151
Parallel [x] 164
PCL Emul 218
PDF 217
PostScript 217
Quality 214
Reports 156
Security Audit Log 173
Serial [x] 166
Set Date/Time 174
Settings 211
SMTP Setup 169
Standard Network 158
Standard USB 163
Substitute Size 149
TCP/IP 160
Universal Setup 155
Utilities 216
Wireless 162
XPS 217
menus diagram 144
message
e‑mail options 110
Miscellaneous Security Settings
menu 171
mobile device
printing from 88
moving the printer 11, 243, 244
Multi Send
adding a profile 25
setting up 25
multipurpose feeder
loading 70
MyShortcut
about 24
N
Network [x] menu 158
Network [x] software error
[54] 273
Network Card menu 159
Network Reports menu 159
network setup page
printing 56
No analog phone line connected to
modem, fax is disabled. 273
Non‑Dell [supply type], see User’s
Guide [33.xy] 273
non‑volatile memory 228
erasing 229
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 273
number of remaining pages
estimate 235
Index
O
optional card
installing 33
options
2100‑sheet tray, installing 46
550‑sheet tray, installing 46
firmware cards 28
Internal Solutions Port,
installing 35
memory card 28, 32
printer hard disk, installing 39
printer hard disk, removing 43
options, copy screen
copy from 102
scale 103
options, touch‑screen
copy 103
e‑mail 110, 112
ordering supplies
using Printer Home 236
organizing cables 48
original size
e‑mail options 111
scan options 141
output file type
changing 109
P
page setup
e‑mail options 112
fax options 135
scan options 142
paper
characteristics 79
different sizes, copying 96
letterhead 80
preprinted forms 80
recycled 80
saving 100
selecting 80
storing 79, 82
unacceptable 80
Universal size setting 57
using recycled 223
Paper changes needed 274
paper characteristics 79
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 287
paper jams
avoiding 248
337
paper jams, clearing
behind rear door 255
duplex 258
in automatic document feeder top
cover 261
in manual feeder 260
in tray [x] 259
inside the printer 251
standard bin jam 257
upper rear door 254
Paper Loading menu 153
paper size
setting 57
Paper Size/Type menu 146
paper sizes
supported by the printer 82
Paper Texture menu 149
paper type
setting 57
paper types
supported by printer 83
Paper Weight menu 151
paper weights
supported by printer 83
Parallel [x] menu 164
Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 274
parts
checking status 235
checking, from printer control
panel 235
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 235
PCL Emul menu 218
PDF menu 217
Personal Identification Number
method
using 53
phone splitter 120
photos
copying 94
placing separator sheets between
copies 99
port settings
configuring 54
PostScript menu 217
power cord socket 48
preparing to set up the printer on
an Ethernet network 51
print driver
hardware options, adding 51
print irregularities 303
print job
canceling, from computer 91
print quality
cleaning the scanner glass 233
print quality troubleshooting
blank pages 301
characters have jagged edges 295
clipped pages or images 296
compressed images appear on
prints 297
gray background on prints 298
horizontal voids appear on
prints 299
print irregularities 303
print is too dark 304
print is too light 306
printer is printing solid black
pages 302
repeating defects appear on
prints 307
shadow images appear on
prints 308
skewed print 308
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 309
streaked vertical lines 310
toner fog or background
shading 311
toner rubs off 312
toner specks appear on prints 312
transparency print quality is
poor 312
uneven print density 313
white streaks 313
print troubleshooting
envelope seals when printing 289
error reading flash drive 289
held jobs do not print 288
incorrect characters print 290
incorrect margins on prints 300
jammed pages are not
reprinted 286
job prints from wrong tray 290
job prints on wrong paper 290
jobs do not print 292
Large jobs do not collate 291
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 291
paper curl 301
paper frequently jams 287
print job takes longer than
expected 293
Index
tray linking does not work 294
unexpected page breaks
occur 295
printer 50
basic model 12
fully configured 12
minimum clearances 11
moving 11, 243, 244
selecting a location 11
shipping 244
printer configurations 12
printer control panel 16
factory defaults, restoring 247
indicator light 16
Sleep button light 16
Printer had to restart. Last job may
be incomplete. 274
printer hard disk
disposing of 228
encrypting 230
installing 39
removing 43
wiping 229
printer hard disk encryption 230
printer hard disk memory
erasing 229
printer information
where to find 10
printer IP address
finding 21
printer is printing blank pages 301
printer messages
[x]‑ page jam, open upper rear
door. [202] 254
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder.
[250] 260
[x]‑page jam, lift front cover to
remove cartridge. [200–
201] 251
[x]‑page jam, open automatic
feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 261
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x].
[24x] 259
[x]‑page jam, open upper and
lower rear door. [231–234] 255
[x]‑page jam, remove standard bin
jam. [203] 257
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to
clear duplex. [235–239] 258
Cartridge low [88.xy] 264
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 264
338
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 264
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] load [orientation] 264
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] load
[orientation] 264
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 264
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 265
Check tray [x] connection 265
Close door or insert cartridge 265
Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job
[2yy.xx] 265
Close front door 266
Close top access cover 266
Complex page, some data may not
have printed [39] 266
Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored [57] 266
Defective flash detected [51] 266
Disk full 62 266
Disk full, scan job canceled 266
Disk must be formatted for use in
this device 267
Disk near full. Securely clearing
disk space. 267
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB. 267
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 267
Fax memory full 267
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 267
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 267
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 268
Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 268
Imaging unit low [84.xy] 268
Imaging unit nearly low
[84.xy] 268
Imaging unit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 268
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 268
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
source] [34] 268
Insert Tray [x] 269
Install duplex 269
Install Tray [x] 269
Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment operation
[37] 269
Insufficient memory to collate job
[37] 270
Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 270
Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 270
Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored
[37] 270
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 270
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name [paper
orientation] 270
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 271
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 271
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 271
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] [paper
orientation] 271
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 272
Load manual feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 272
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 272
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 272
Maintenance kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 272
managing 245
Memory full [38] 272
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 272
Memory full, cannot send
faxes 273
Network [x] software error
[54] 273
Index
No analog phone line connected
to modem, fax is disabled. 273
Non‑Dell [supply type], see User’s
Guide [33.xy] 273
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 273
Paper changes needed 274
Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 274
Printer had to restart. Last job
may be incomplete. 274
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
cartridge [31.xy] 274
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
imaging unit [31.xy] 274
Remove defective disk [61] 275
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 275
Remove paper from standard
output bin 275
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 275
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 275
Replace cartridge, printer region
mismatch [42.xy] 275
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated
pages remain [84.xy] 275
Replace jammed originals if
restarting job. 276
Replace last scanned page and
jammed originals if restarting
job. 276
Replace maintenance kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 276
Replace missing fuser [80.xx] 276
Replace roller kit [81.xx] 276
Replace separator pad 276
Replace unsupported cartridge
[32.xy] 277
Replace unsupported imaging unit
[32.xy] 277
Replace wiper 277
Restore held jobs? 277
Scan document too long 277
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 277
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 277
Scanner disabled. Contact system
administrator if problem persists.
[840.02] 278
339
Scanner jam, remove all originals
from the scanner [2yy.xx] 278
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 278
Scanner maintenance required
soon, use ADF Kit [80] 278
Serial option [x] error [54] 278
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 278
Some held jobs were not
restored 278
Standard network software error
[54] 279
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 279
Supply needed to complete
job 279
Too many disks installed [58] 279
Too many flash options installed
[58] 279
Too many trays attached [58] 280
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 280
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 280
Unsupported camera mode,
unplug camera and change
mode 280
Unsupported disk 280
Unsupported option in slot [x]
[55] 280
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 267
USB port [x] disabled [56] 280
Weblink server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 281
printer options troubleshooting
internal option is not
detected 283
internal print server 284
Internal Solutions Port 284
tray problems 285
USB/parallel interface card 286
printer parts
controller board 28
printer problems, solving basic 281
printer security
information on 231
printing
canceling, from the printer control
panel 91
directory list 91
font sample list 91
forms 85
from a mobile device using
AirPrint 88
from a mobile device using Dell
Mobile Print 88
from flash drive 86
from Macintosh 85
from Windows 85
menu settings page 55
network setup page 56
printing a directory list 91
printing a document 85
printing a font sample list 91
printing a menu settings page 55
printing a network setup page 56
printing confidential and other held
jobs
from a Macintosh computer 90
from Windows 90
printing forms 85
printing from a flash drive 86
printing slows down 294
publications
where to find 10
Push Button Configuration method
using 53
Q
Quality menu 214
Quiet Mode 224
R
recipient(s)
e‑mail options 110
recycled paper
using 80, 223
recycling
Dell products 227
reducing a copy 98
reducing noise 224
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
cartridge [31.xy] 274
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
imaging unit [31.xy] 274
Remote Operator Panel
setting up 26
Remove defective disk [61] 275
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 275
Index
Remove paper from standard
output bin 275
removing printer hard disk 43
repeat print jobs 89
printing from a Macintosh
computer 90
printing from Windows 90
repeating defects appear on
prints 307
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 275
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 275
Replace cartridge, printer region
mismatch [42.xy] 275
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated
pages remain [84.xy] 275
Replace jammed originals if
restarting job. 276
Replace last scanned page and
jammed originals if restarting
job. 276
Replace maintenance kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 276
Replace missing fuser [80.xx] 276
Replace roller kit [81.xx] 276
Replace separator pad 276
Replace unsupported cartridge
[32.xy] 277
Replace unsupported imaging unit
[32.xy] 277
Replace wiper 277
replacing the toner
cartridge 237, 240
reports
viewing 246
Reports menu 156
reserve print jobs 89
printing from a Macintosh
computer 90
printing from Windows 90
resolution
e‑mail options 111
fax options 135
scan options 142
resolution, fax
changing 131
Restore held jobs? 277
restoring factory default
settings 247
RJ‑11 adapter 123
340
S
safety information 8, 9
Save As Shortcut
copy options 104
e‑mail options 110
scan options 141
saving paper 100
Scan document too long 277
scan options
darkness 142
file name 141
original size 141
page setup 142
resolution 142
Save As Shortcut 141
Scan Preview 143
send as 142
Scan Preview
scan options 143
scan preview
fax options 135
scan screen
content source 142
content type 142
Scan to Computer
setting up 140
Scan to Network
setting up 25
using 137
scan troubleshooting
cannot scan from a computer 324
partial document or photo
scans 324
scan job was not successful 325
scanner unit does not
close 317, 326
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 326
scanner
Automatic document feeder
(ADF) 15
functions 14
scanner glass 15
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 277
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 277
Scanner disabled. Contact system
administrator if problem persists.
[840.02] 278
scanner glass
cleaning 233
copying using 94
Scanner jam, remove all originals
from the scanner [2yy.xx] 278
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 278
Scanner maintenance required
soon, use ADF Kit [80] 278
scanning
from a flash drive 141
quick copy 93
to a computer using the
Embedded Web Server 140
to an FTP address 138, 139
scanning to a computer 140
using the Embedded Web
Server 140
scanning to a flash drive 141
scanning to an FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
computer 137
using a shortcut number 138
using the address book 139
using the printer control
panel 138
scanning to network
destinations 137
security
modifying confidential print
settings 90
Security Audit Log menu 173
security settings information
erasing 229
security Web page
where to find 231
selecting a location for the
printer 11
selecting paper 80
send as
e‑mail options 111
scan options 142
sending a fax 129
sending a fax using the printer
control panel 128
sending an e‑mail using the printer
control panel 108
sending fax
using shortcuts 129
using the address book 130
Index
sending fax at a scheduled
time 130
sending fax using the address
book 130
Serial [x] menu 166
Serial option [x] error [54] 278
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 278
serial printing
setting up 55
Set Date/Time menu 174
setting
paper size 57
paper type 57
TCP/IP address 160
setting the fax number 127
setting the outgoing fax name 127
setting the Universal paper size 57
setting up e‑mail alerts 246
setting up fax
country‑ or region‑specific 123
digital telephone service 121
DSL connection 119
standard telephone line
connection 115
VoIP connection 120
setting up fax and e‑mail
functions 322
setting up serial printing 55
Settings menu 211
shipping the printer 244
shortcuts, creating
copy screen 95
e‑mail 107
fax destination 131
FTP address 138
FTP destination 137
showing icons on the home
screen 22
sides (duplex)
copy options 103
Sleep mode
adjusting 225
SMTP Setup menu 169
software
Status Messenger 245
Status Monitor Center 245
Supplies Ordering Utility 236
Some held jobs were not
restored 278
Standard Network menu 158
Standard network software error
54] 279
341
Standard USB menu 163
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 279
statement of volatility 228
Status Monitor Center
accessing 245
status of parts
checking 235
status of supplies
checking 235
storing
paper 82
supplies 236
storing print jobs 89
streaked horizontal lines appear on
prints 309
streaked vertical lines appear on
prints 310
streaks appear 313
subject and message information
adding to e‑mail 109
Substitute Size menu 149
supplies
checking status 235
checking, from printer control
panel 235
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 235
ordering 236
storing 236
using recycled paper 223
Supplies Ordering Utility
ordering supplies 236
Supply needed to complete job 279
supply notifications
configuring 246
supported flash drives 87
supported paper sizes 82
supported paper types 83
supported paper weights 83
T
TCP/IP menu 160
the scanner does not respond 327
tips
card stock 77
labels, paper 78
on using envelopes 77
on using letterhead 78
transparencies 79
tips on using envelopes 77
tips on using letterhead 78
toner cartridge
replacing 237, 240
toner darkness
adjusting 85
Too many disks installed [58] 279
Too many flash options installed
[58] 279
Too many trays attached [58] 280
touch screen
buttons 19
transparencies
copying on 94
loading 70
tips 79
tray
loading 57
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 280
trays
linking 74, 75
unlinking 74, 75
troubleshooting
an application error has
occurred 328
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 328
checking an unresponsive
printer 281
contacting technical support 329
fax and e‑mail functions are not
set up 322
solving basic printer
problems 281
the scanner does not respond 327
troubleshooting, copy
copier does not respond 314
partial document or photo
copies 315
poor copy quality 315
poor scanned image quality 324
scanner unit does not
close 317, 326
troubleshooting, display
printer display is blank 283
troubleshooting, fax
caller ID is not shown 318
can receive but not send
faxes 320
can send but not receive
faxes 321
cannot send or receive a fax 318
Index
received fax has poor print
quality 322
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 287
troubleshooting, print
envelope seals when printing 289
error reading flash drive 289
held jobs do not print 288
incorrect characters print 290
incorrect margins on prints 300
jammed pages are not
reprinted 286
job prints from wrong tray 290
job prints on wrong paper 290
jobs do not print 292
Large jobs do not collate 291
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 291
paper curl 301
paper frequently jams 287
print job takes longer than
expected 293
tray linking does not work 294
unexpected page breaks
occur 295
troubleshooting, print quality
blank pages 301
characters have jagged edges 295
clipped pages or images 296
compressed images appear on
prints 297
gray background on prints 298
horizontal voids appear on
prints 299
print irregularities 303
print is too dark 304
print is too light 306
printer is printing solid black
pages 302
repeating defects appear on
prints 307
shadow images appear on
prints 308
skewed print 308
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 309
streaked vertical lines 310
toner fog or background
shading 311
toner rubs off 312
toner specks appear on prints 312
342
transparency print quality is
poor 312
uneven print density 313
white streaks on a page 313
troubleshooting, printer options
internal option is not
detected 283
internal print server 284
Internal Solutions Port 284
tray problems 285
USB/parallel interface card 286
troubleshooting, printing
printing slows down 294
troubleshooting, scan
cannot scan from a computer 324
partial document or photo
scans 324
scan job was not successful 325
scanner unit does not
close 317, 326
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 326
U
understanding the home screen
buttons and icons 17
uneven print density 313
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 280
Universal paper size
setting 57
Universal Setup menu 155
unlinking trays 74, 75
Unsupported camera mode, unplug
camera and change mode 280
Unsupported option in slot [x]
[55] 280
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 267
USB port 48
USB port [x] disabled [56] 280
USB/parallel interface card
troubleshooting 286
using a shortcut number
scanning to an FTP address 138
using Forms and Favorites 85
using recycled paper 223
using shortcuts
sending fax 129
using the address book 109
sending fax 130
using the touch‑screen buttons 19
Utilities menu 216
V
verify print jobs 89
printing from a Macintosh
computer 90
printing from Windows 90
vertical voids appear 313
viewing
reports 246
viewing a fax log 132
virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 245
voice mail
setting up 115
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
fax setup 120
voids appear 313
VoIP adapter 120
volatile memory 228
erasing 228
volatility
statement of 228
W
Weblink server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 281
wiping the printer hard disk 229
Wireless menu 162
wireless network
configuration information 52
wireless network setup
using the Embedded Web
Server 54
wireless setup wizard
using 53
X
XPS menu 217